2016-2019 Mercedes GLE SUV Driving and parking User Manual
MyCarUserManual.com
USER MANUALS FOR EVERY MAKE & MODEL

Driving and parking for Your Mercedes GLE SUV First Generation (2016-2019)

Driving143Running-in notesDrivingImportant safety notesImportant safety notesIn certain driving and driving safety systems, theG WARNINGsensors adjust automatically while a certain dis-Objects in the driver's footwell may restricttance is being driven after the vehicle has beenthe clearance around the pedals or block adelivered or after repairs. Full system effective-ness is not reached until the end of this teach-indepressed pedal. This jeopardises the and parkingating and road safety of the vehicle. There is aBrake pads/linings and discs that are either newrisk of an have been replaced only achieve optimumStow all objects securely in the vehicle so thatbraking effect after several hundred kilometresthey do not get into the driver's driving. Compensate for the reduced brakingAlways fit the floormats securely and as pre-effect by applying greater force to the brakescribed in order to ensure that there is room for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place several floor-The first 1,500 kmmats on top of one you treat the engine with sufficient care fromG WARNINGthe very start, you will be rewarded with excel-lent performance for the remainder of theUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageengine's the pedals, e.g.:R Drive at varying vehicle speeds and engineR shoes with thick solesspeeds for the first 1500 km.R shoes with high heelsR Avoid overstraining the vehicle during thisR slippersperiod, e.g. driving at full throttle.R Change gear in good time, before the revThere is a risk of an needle is Ô of the way to the red areaWear suitable footwear to ensure correctof the rev of the pedals.R Do not shift down a gear manually in order tobrake.G WARNINGR Try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalIf you switch off the ignition while driving,beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).safety-relevant functions are only availableAdditional note
Driving
143
Running-in notes
Driving
Important safety notes
Important safety notes
In certain driving and driving safety systems, the
G WARNING
sensors adjust automatically while a certain dis-
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
tance is being driven after the vehicle has been
the clearance around the pedals or block a
delivered or after repairs. Full system effective-
ness is not reached until the end of this teach-in
depressed pedal. This jeopardises the oper-
process.
Driving and parking
ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a
Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new
risk of an accident.
or have been replaced only achieve optimum
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that
braking effect after several hundred kilometres
they do not get into the driver's footwell.
of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking
Always fit the floormats securely and as pre-
effect by applying greater force to the brake
scribed in order to ensure that there is always
pedal.
sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place several floor-
The first 1,500 km
mats on top of one another.
If you treat the engine with sufficient care from
G WARNING
the very start, you will be rewarded with excel-
lent performance for the remainder of the
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
engine's life.
of the pedals, e.g.:
R Drive at varying vehicle speeds and engine
R shoes with thick soles
speeds for the first 1500 km.
R shoes with high heels
R Avoid overstraining the vehicle during this
R slippers
period, e.g. driving at full throttle.
R Change gear in good time, before the rev
There is a risk of an accident.
counter needle is Ô of the way to the red area
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
of the rev counter.
usage of the pedals.
R Do not shift down a gear manually in order to
brake.
G WARNING
R Try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
safety-relevant functions are only available
Additional notes on running in Mercedes-AMG
vehicles:
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
R For the first 1,500 km do not drive at speeds
boosting effect. You will require considerably
above 140 km/h.
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
R Only allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
of an accident.
R Ideally, for the first 1,500 km, drive in the
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Comfort drive program.
G WARNING
After 1,500 km, you may gradually accelerate
the vehicle to full road and engine speeds.
If the parking brake has not been fully
You should also observe these notes on running-
released when driving, the parking brake can:
in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your
vehicle have been replaced.
R overheat and cause a fire
Always observe the maximum permissible
R lose its hold function.
speed.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
Z
Driving144KEYLESS-GO! Do not warm up the engine while away immediately. Avoid high engineGeneral notesspeeds and full throttle until the engine hasreached its operating with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with aIn vehicles with automatic transmission,key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO func-engage positions P and R only when the vehi-tion and a detachable Start/Stop is stationary.A check that periodically establishes a radioWhere possible, avoid spinning the driveconnection between the vehicle and the keywheels when pulling away on slippery whether a valid key is in the and parkingYou could otherwise damage the drive occurs, for example, when the engine isstarted.! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oilWhen you insert the Start/Stop button in thetemperatures (below +20 †), the maximumignition lock, the system needs approximatelyengine speed is restricted in order to protecttwo seconds to recognise it. You can then usethe engine. To protect the engine and main-the Start/Stop smooth engine operation, avoid driving atPressing the Start/Stop button several times infull throttle when the engine is corresponds to the different keyPlug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separatepositions in the ignition lock. This is the caseOwner's Manual. Otherwise, you may fail to rec-only if you are not depressing the brake you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts positionsTo start the vehicle without actively using thekey:KeyR the Start/Stop button must be inserted in theignition lockR the key must be in the vehicleR the vehicle must not be locked with the key orKEYLESS-GO ( Y page 84)Do not keep the key:R with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another keyR with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foilR inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the function of the key wi
Driving
144
KEYLESS-GO
! Do not warm up the engine while stationary.
Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine
General notes
speeds and full throttle until the engine has
reached its operating temperature.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a
In vehicles with automatic transmission,
key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO func-
engage positions P and R only when the vehi-
tion and a detachable Start/Stop button.
cle is stationary.
A check that periodically establishes a radio
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
connection between the vehicle and the key
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.
determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle.
Driving and parking
You could otherwise damage the drive train.
This occurs, for example, when the engine is
started.
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil
When you insert the Start/Stop button in the
temperatures (below +20 †), the maximum
ignition lock, the system needs approximately
engine speed is restricted in order to protect
two seconds to recognise it. You can then use
the engine. To protect the engine and main-
the Start/Stop button.
tain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
full throttle when the engine is cold.
succession corresponds to the different key
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
positions in the ignition lock. This is the case
Owner's Manual. Otherwise, you may fail to rec-
only if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
ognise dangers.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
Key positions
To start the vehicle without actively using the
key:
Key
R the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock
R the key must be in the vehicle
R the vehicle must not be locked with the key or
KEYLESS-GO ( Y page 84)
Do not keep the key:
R with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another key
R with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
R inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
This can affect the function of the key with KEY-
LESS-GO.
g To remove the key
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem-
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as
perature-controlled cup holder ( Y page 324).
the windscreen wipers
Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
detected.
and drive position
If you lock the vehicle with the key's remote
3 To start the vehicle
control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:
i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it
R you will no longer be able to switch on the
can still be turned in the ignition lock. How-
ignition with the Start/Stop button
ever, the ignition will not be switched on. The
R you will no longer be able to start the engine
engine cannot be started.
with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
on the front door ( Y page 90), you can continue
to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.
Driving145You can switch off the engine while the vehicle isX Remove Start/Stop button : from ignitionin motion by pressing and holding the Start/lock ;.Stop button for around three seconds. This func-You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-tion operates independently of the ECO start/ton from the ignition lock when you leave thestop automatic engine switch-off . You should, however, always take thekey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long asKey positions with KEYLESS-GOthe key is in the vehicle:R the vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonDriving and parkingR the electrically powered equipment can beoperatedStarting the vehicleImportant safety notesG WARNING: Start/Stop buttonIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,; Ignition lockthey can:When you switch on the ignition, all the indicatorR open doors and endanger other persons orlamps on the instrument cluster light up. Furtherroad usersinformation on situations in which an indicatorR climb out and be injured by the trafficlamp either fails to go out after the engine isstarted or lights up while driving ( Y page 292).R operate vehicle equipment and, for exam-If Start/Stop button : has not yet beenple, trap , this is the same as the key having beenChildren could also set the vehicle in motion, example by:X To switch on the power supply: pressR releasing the parking brakeStart/Stop button : power supply is switched on. You can nowR shifting the automatic transmission out ofactivate the windscreen wipers, for position PThe power supply is switched off again if:R starting the engine.R the driver's door is opened andThere is a risk of an accident and injury.R you press Start/Stop button : twice in thisWhen leaving the vehicle, always take the keykey positionwith you and lock the vehicle. Never leaveX To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stopchildren unattended in the vehicle. Alwaysbutton : the key out of reach
Driving
145
You can switch off the engine while the vehicle is
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
lock ;.
Stop button for around three seconds. This func-
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
tion operates independently of the ECO start/
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
stop automatic engine switch-off function.
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
key with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
the key is in the vehicle:
R the vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
Driving and parking
R the electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the vehicle
Important safety notes
G WARNING
: Start/Stop button
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
; Ignition lock
they can:
When you switch on the ignition, all the indicator
R open doors and endanger other persons or
lamps on the instrument cluster light up. Further
road users
information on situations in which an indicator
R climb out and be injured by the traffic
lamp either fails to go out after the engine is
started or lights up while driving ( Y page 292).
R operate vehicle equipment and, for exam-
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
ple, trap themselves.
pressed, this is the same as the key having been
Children could also set the vehicle in motion,
removed.
for example by:
X To switch on the power supply: press
R releasing the parking brake
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can now
R shifting the automatic transmission out of
activate the windscreen wipers, for example.
park position P
The power supply is switched off again if:
R starting the engine.
R the driver's door is opened and
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
R you press Start/Stop button : twice in this
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
key position
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
children unattended in the vehicle. Always
button : twice.
keep the key out of reach of children.
The ignition is switched on.
If you press Start/Stop button : once in this
G WARNING
key position, the ignition is deactivated again.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
Removing the Start/Stop button
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
You can remove the Start/Stop button from the
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
using the key.
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
It is possible to switch between KEYLESS-GO
out sufficient ventilation.
mode and key operation only when the trans-
mission is in position j.
Z
Driving146G WARNINGX Depress the brake pedal and keep materials introduced throughX Press the Start/Stop button onceenvironmental influence or by animals can( Y page 144).ignite if in contact with the exhaust system orVehicles with a petrol engine: the engineparts of the engine that heat up. There is a with a diesel engine: preglow isactivated and the engine out regular checks to make sure thatDriving and parkingthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustPulling notesGeneral notesG WARNINGVehicles with a petrol engine: the catalyticIf the engine speed is above the idling speedconverter is preheated for up to 30 secondsafter a cold start. The sound of the engine mayand you engage transmission position D or R,change during this vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an transmissionWhen engaging transmission position D or R,X Shift the transmission to position jalways firmly depress the brake pedal and do( Y page 153).not simultaneously transmission position indicator on themultifunction display shows jDepress the accelerator carefully when pulling( Y page 154). vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledi You can start the engine in transmissionaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop j and can open the doors from the inside at procedure using the keyYou can also deactivate the automatic lockingX To start a diesel engine: turn the key tofeature ( Y page 253).position 2 in the ignition lock ( Y page 144).It is only possible to shift the transmission fromThe % preglow indicator lamp on theposition P to the desired position if you depressinstrument cluster lights brake pedal. Only then is the parking lockreleased. If you do not depress the brake pedal,X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lockthe DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved
Driving
146
G WARNING
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
Flammable materials introduced through
X Press the Start/Stop button once
environmental influence or by animals can
( Y page 144).
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
Vehicles with a petrol engine: the engine
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
starts.
of fire.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is
activated and the engine starts.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
Driving and parking
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
Pulling away
system.
General notes
General notes
G WARNING
Vehicles with a petrol engine: the catalytic
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds
after a cold start. The sound of the engine may
and you engage transmission position D or R,
change during this time.
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
Automatic transmission
When engaging transmission position D or R,
X Shift the transmission to position j
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
( Y page 153).
not simultaneously accelerate.
The transmission position indicator on the
multifunction display shows j
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
( Y page 154).
away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled
i You can start the engine in transmission
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
positions j and i.
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
Starting procedure using the key
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to
feature ( Y page 253).
position 2 in the ignition lock ( Y page 144).
It is only possible to shift the transmission from
The % preglow indicator lamp on the
position P to the desired position if you depress
instrument cluster lights up.
the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock
released. If you do not depress the brake pedal,
X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock
the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but
( Y page 144) and release it as soon as the
the parking lock remains engaged.
engine is running.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you can
after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
start the engine without preglow if the engine
verter to reach its operating temperature
is warm.
more quickly.
Information on automatically releasing the elec-
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
trical parking brake ( Y page 168).
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
vehicle without inserting the key in the ignition
lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the
Start/Stop button must be inserted in the igni-
tion lock. This mode for starting the engine man-
ually operates independently of the ECO start/
stop automatic engine start function.
Driving147Pulling away with a trailerHill start assist is not active if:R you are pulling away on a level road or adownhill gradientR the transmission is in position NR the electric parking brake is appliedR ESP ® is malfunctioningDriving and parkingECO start/stop functionIntroductionPlug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the ECOstart/stop function in the separate Owner'sTo ensure that you do not roll backwards away on an uphill slope, apply the electricparking ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stoppedX Press and hold handle :.under certain electric parking brake continues to brakeand prevent the vehicle from rolling back-When the vehicle pulls away again, the automatically. The ECO start/stop func-tion thereby helps you to reduce the fuel con-The red ! indicator lamp in the instrumentsumption and emissions of your remains lit.X Depress the accelerator safety notesX As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination isheld by the driving force of the engine, releaseG WARNINGlever :.the electric parking brake is releasedIf the engine is switched off automatically andThe red ! indicator lamp in the instrumentyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedcluster goes . The vehicle may begin is a risk of accident and start assistIf you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstHill start assist helps you when pulling away for-rolling or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holdsthe vehicle for a short time after you haveremoved your foot from the brake pedal. ThisGeneral notesgives you enough time to move your foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal anddepress it before the vehicle begins to roll.G WARNINGAfter a while, hill start assist no longer holdsthe vehicle and it may roll away. There is a riskof an accident and , qui
Driving
147
Pulling away with a trailer
Hill start assist is not active if:
R you are pulling away on a level road or a
downhill gradient
R the transmission is in position N
R the electric parking brake is applied
R ESP ® is malfunctioning
Driving and parking
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the ECO
start/stop function in the separate Owner's
To ensure that you do not roll backwards when
Manual.
pulling away on an uphill slope, apply the electric
parking brake.
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped
X Press and hold handle :.
under certain conditions.
The electric parking brake continues to brake
and prevent the vehicle from rolling back-
When the vehicle pulls away again, the engine
wards.
starts automatically. The ECO start/stop func-
tion thereby helps you to reduce the fuel con-
The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument
sumption and emissions of your vehicle.
cluster remains lit.
X Depress the accelerator pedal.
Important safety notes
X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is
held by the driving force of the engine, release
G WARNING
lever :.
the electric parking brake is released
If the engine is switched off automatically and
The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
cluster goes out.
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
Hill start assist
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for-
rolling away.
wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds
the vehicle for a short time after you have
removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
General notes
gives you enough time to move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
G WARNING
After a while, hill start assist no longer holds
the vehicle and it may roll away. There is a risk
of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
: ECO start/stop display
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
The ECO start/stop function is switched on
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
whenever you start the engine using the key or
assist.
the Start/Stop button.
If the è ECO symbol is shown on the multi-
function display, the ECO start/stop function
Z
Driving148switches the engine off automatically if the vehi-ically a maximum of four times (initial stop, thencle stops subsequent stops) in succession. Theç ECO symbol is shown on the multifunctionIf the ECO start/stop function has beendisplay after the engine has been started auto-switched off manually ( Y page 149) or as thematically for the fourth time. When the èresult of a malfunction, the è or ç ECOECO symbol is shown on the multifunction dis-symbol is not , automatic engine stop is possible -AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stopMercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-function is available only in drive programssecutive automatic engine stops is and and parkingAutomatic engine startAutomatic engine stopThe engine is started automatically if:If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with thetransmission in D or N, the ECO start/stop func-R you switch off the ECO start/stop function bytion switches off the engine the ECO buttonThe ECO start/stop function is operational andR in transmission position D or N, the brakethe è ECO symbol is shown on the multi-pedal is released and the HOLD function is notfunction display if:activeR the indicator lamp in the ECO button is litR you depress the accelerator pedalgreenR you engage reverse gear RR the Sport Plus drive program is not selectedR you move the transmission out of position P(Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC)R you switch to the Sport Plus drive programR the Sport Plus or Sport drive program is not(Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC)selected (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)R you switch to the Sport Plus or Sport driveR none of the off-road programs are selectedprogram (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)R the outside temperature and atmospheric airR you activate manual gearshifting (Mercedes-pressure are within the range that is suitableAMG vehicles)for the systemR you switch to the Off-road drive programR the engine is at normal operating temperature(vehic
Driving
148
switches the engine off automatically if the vehi-
ically a maximum of four times (initial stop, then
cle stops moving.
three subsequent stops) in succession. The
ç ECO symbol is shown on the multifunction
If the ECO start/stop function has been
display after the engine has been started auto-
switched off manually ( Y page 149) or as the
matically for the fourth time. When the è
result of a malfunction, the è or ç ECO
ECO symbol is shown on the multifunction dis-
symbol is not displayed.
play, automatic engine stop is possible again.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-
function is available only in drive programs
secutive automatic engine stops is unlimited.
Comfort and Slippery.
Driving and parking
Automatic engine start
Automatic engine stop
The engine is started automatically if:
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the
transmission in D or N, the ECO start/stop func-
R you switch off the ECO start/stop function by
tion switches off the engine automatically.
pressing the ECO button
The ECO start/stop function is operational and
R in transmission position D or N, the brake
the è ECO symbol is shown on the multi-
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not
function display if:
active
R the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
R you depress the accelerator pedal
green
R you engage reverse gear R
R the Sport Plus drive program is not selected
R you move the transmission out of position P
(Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC)
R you switch to the Sport Plus drive program
R the Sport Plus or Sport drive program is not
(Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC)
selected (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
R you switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive
R none of the off-road programs are selected
program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
R the outside temperature and atmospheric air
R you activate manual gearshifting (Mercedes-
pressure are within the range that is suitable
AMG vehicles)
for the system
R you switch to the Off-road drive program
R the engine is at normal operating temperature
(vehicles without Off-Road Engineering pack-
R the set temperature for the vehicle interior
age)
has been reached
R you switch to the Off-road or Off-road Plus
R the battery is sufficiently charged
drive program (vehicles with Off-Road Engi-
neering package)
R the system does not detect moisture on the
windscreen when the air-conditioning system
R you unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
is switched on
er's door
R the bonnet is closed
R the vehicle starts to roll
R the driver's door is closed and the driver's
R the brake system requires this
seat belt is fastened
R the temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
If all conditions for automatic engine stop are
ates from the set range
not fulfilled, the ç ECO symbol is shown.
R the system detects moisture on the wind-
All the vehicle's systems remain active when the
screen when the air-conditioning system is
engine is switched off automatically.
switched on
The HOLD function can be activated if the
R the battery's charge status is too low
engine has been switched off automatically. It is
Shifting the transmission to position P does not
then not necessary to continue applying the
start the engine.
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
If you shift the transmission from R to D, the
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
ECO start/stop function is available again as
starts automatically and the braking effect of
soon as the è ECO symbol reappears on the
the HOLD function is deactivated.
multifunction display.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): the engine can be switched off automat-
Driving149Switching the ECO start/stop functionX To switch off: in the Comfort drive program,off/onpress ECO button :.orAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-X Activate manual gearshifting ( Y page 157).cles)orX Switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive pro-gram ( Y page 151).Indicator lamp ; and the è or ç ECODriving and parkingsymbol on the multifunction display go out.X To switch on: press ECO button :.Indicator lamp ; lights up. When theSport Plus or Sport drive program is activa-ted, the automatic transmission switches tothe Comfort drive all conditions for automatic engine stop( Y page 148) are fulfilled, the è ECO sym-bol is shown on the multifunction display.X To switch off: press ECO button :.If all conditions for automatic engine stopIndicator lamp ; and the è or ç ECO( Y page 148) are not fulfilled, the ç ECOsymbol on the multifunction display go is shown on the multifunction display.X To switch on: press ECO button :.If this is the case, the ECO start/stop functionis not lamp ; lights up. If all conditionsfor automatic engine stop ( Y page 148) areIf indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stopfulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown onfunction has been switched off manually or asthe multifunction result of a malfunction. The engine will thenIf all conditions for automatic engine stopnot be switched off automatically when the vehi-( Y page 148) are not fulfilled, the ç ECOcle is shown on the multifunction this is the case, the ECO start/stop functionis not indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been switched off manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will thennot be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle -AMG vehiclesZ
Driving
149
Switching the ECO start/stop function
X To switch off: in the Comfort drive program,
off/on
press ECO button :.
or
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
X Activate manual gearshifting ( Y page 157).
cles)
or
X Switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive pro-
gram ( Y page 151).
Indicator lamp ; and the è or ç ECO
Driving and parking
symbol on the multifunction display go out.
X To switch on: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. When the
Sport Plus or Sport drive program is activa-
ted, the automatic transmission switches to
the Comfort drive program.
If all conditions for automatic engine stop
( Y page 148) are fulfilled, the è ECO sym-
bol is shown on the multifunction display.
X To switch off: press ECO button :.
If all conditions for automatic engine stop
Indicator lamp ; and the è or ç ECO
( Y page 148) are not fulfilled, the ç ECO
symbol on the multifunction display go out.
symbol is shown on the multifunction display.
X To switch on: press ECO button :.
If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function
is not available.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions
for automatic engine stop ( Y page 148) are
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown on
function has been switched off manually or as
the multifunction display.
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
If all conditions for automatic engine stop
not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
( Y page 148) are not fulfilled, the ç ECO
cle stops.
symbol is shown on the multifunction display.
If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function
is not available.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been switched off manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
cle stops.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Z
Driving150Problems with the engineProblemPossible causes/consequences and M SolutionsThe engine does notR The engine electronics are . The starter motorR The fuel supply is be attempting to restart the engine:X Turn the key in the ignition lock back to position and parkingorX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps onthe instrument cluster go out.X Restart the engine ( Y page 145). Avoid excessively long and fre-quent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist engine does notThe fuel tank is . The starter motorX Refuel the be heard. Thereserve fuel warninglamp is lit and the fuelgauge display shows 0.The engine does notThe on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak orstart. You cannot starter motor.X Jump-start the vehicle ( Y page 359).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist starter motor was exposed to excessively high thermal load.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.X Try to start the engine the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist with a petrolMalfunction of the engine electronics or a mechanical component ofengine:the engine management engine is not running X Depress the accelerator pedal only and is misfir-Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic damage it.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.
Driving
150
Problems with the engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not
R The engine electronics are malfunctioning.
start. The starter motor
R The fuel supply is malfunctioning.
can be heard.
Before attempting to restart the engine:
X Turn the key in the ignition lock back to position u.
Driving and parking
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps on
the instrument cluster go out.
X Restart the engine ( Y page 145). Avoid excessively long and fre-
quent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
The fuel tank is empty.
start. The starter motor
X Refuel the vehicle.
can be heard. The
reserve fuel warning
lamp is lit and the fuel
gauge display shows 0.
The engine does not
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear
discharged.
the starter motor.
X Jump-start the vehicle ( Y page 359).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to excessively high thermal load.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a petrol
Malfunction of the engine electronics or a mechanical component of
engine:
the engine management system.
The engine is not running X Depress the accelerator pedal only slightly.
smoothly and is misfir-
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
ing.
and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
DYNAMIC SELECT controller 151ProblemPossible causes/consequences and M SolutionsThe coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is notdisplay is showing more being cooled 120 †. The coolant X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant towarning lamp may alsocool on and a warning toneX Check the coolant level ( Y page 340). Observe the warning notesmay you do so and top up the coolant if and parkingIf the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The cool-ant is too hot and the engine is not being cooled sufficiently.X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue drivingto the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-start SELECT controllerPlug-in hybrid: observe the notes on theDYNAMIC SELECT controller in the separateOwner's the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to changethe drive program. Depending on the drive pro-gram selected, the following vehicle character-istics will change:R the drive (engine and transmission manage-ment)R the transmissionX All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller :R the suspensionuntil the desired drive program is selected.R the steeringThe drive program selected appears on theR the availability of the ECO start/stop functionmultifunction display. After five seconds, thisIf the ignition is switched off for less than fourinformation disappears from the , the last drive program selected is activa-In addition, the current drive program settingsted when the engine is next started. If the igni-are shown on the multimedia system is switched off for more than four hours, theComfort drive program is activated when theDrive programs available (all vehiclesexcept Mercedes-AMG vehicles):engine is next urban traffic and stop-st
DYNAMIC SELECT controller 151
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is not
display is showing more being cooled sufficiently.
than 120 †. The coolant X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
warning lamp may also
cool down.
be on and a warning tone
X Check the coolant level ( Y page 340). Observe the warning notes
may sound.
as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
Driving and parking
If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The cool-
ant is too hot and the engine is not being cooled sufficiently.
X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving
to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the
DYNAMIC SELECT controller in the separate
Owner's Manual.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change
the drive program. Depending on the drive pro-
gram selected, the following vehicle character-
istics will change:
R the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R the transmission
X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller :
R the suspension
until the desired drive program is selected.
R the steering
The drive program selected appears on the
R the availability of the ECO start/stop function
multifunction display. After five seconds, this
If the ignition is switched off for less than four
information disappears from the display.
hours, the last drive program selected is activa-
In addition, the current drive program settings
ted when the engine is next started. If the igni-
are shown on the multimedia system display.
tion is switched off for more than four hours, the
Comfort drive program is activated when the
Drive programs available (all vehicles
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
engine is next started.
In urban traffic and stop-start traffic, the Com-
Individual
Personalised settings
fort drive program is recommended.
Sport
Sporty driving characteris-
tics
Comfort
Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
Slippery
Optimised driving charac-
teristics on slippery or
snow-covered roads
Z
Automatic transmission152Off-roadSport PlusOptimised driving charac-Particularly sporty drivingteristics for easily negotia-characteristicsble off-road terrainSlipperyOptimised driving charac-Off-Road Plus Optimised driving charac-teristics on slippery or(vehicles withteristics for rough terrainsnow-covered roadsOff-Road Engi-neering pack-Additional information on drive programsage)( Y page 156).Driving and parkingFurther information on:Automatic transmissionR the Individual, Sport, Comfort and Slipperydrive programs ( Y page 156)Important safety notesR the Off-Road drive program (vehicles withoutOff-Road Engineering package)G WARNING( Y page 226)The automatic transmission switches to neu-R the Off-Road and Off-Road Plus drive pro-tral position N when you switch off the (vehicles with Off-Road EngineeringThe vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anpackage) ( Y page 227) switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the -in hybrid: be sure to read the separateOwner's Manual. Otherwise, you may fail to rec-ognise SELECT leverX Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn DYNAMICSELECT controller : until the desired driveOverview of transmission positionsprogram is drive program selected appears on themultifunction display. After five seconds, thisinformation disappears from the addition, the current drive program settingsare shown on the multimedia system programs available (Mercedes-AMGvehicles):IndividualPersonalised settingsComfortComfortable and economi-cal driving characteristicsj Park position with parking lockSportSporty driving characteris-k Reverse gearticsi Neutralh Drive
Automatic transmission
152
Off-road
Sport Plus
Optimised driving charac-
Particularly sporty driving
teristics for easily negotia-
characteristics
ble off-road terrain
Slippery
Optimised driving charac-
Off-Road Plus Optimised driving charac-
teristics on slippery or
(vehicles with
teristics for rough terrain
snow-covered roads
Off-Road Engi-
neering pack-
Additional information on drive programs
age)
( Y page 156).
Driving and parking
Further information on:
Automatic transmission
R the Individual, Sport, Comfort and Slippery
drive programs ( Y page 156)
Important safety notes
R the Off-Road drive program (vehicles without
Off-Road Engineering package)
G WARNING
( Y page 226)
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
R the Off-Road and Off-Road Plus drive pro-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
grams (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
package) ( Y page 227)
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
Owner's Manual. Otherwise, you may fail to rec-
ognise dangers.
DIRECT SELECT lever
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : until the desired drive
Overview of transmission positions
program is selected.
The drive program selected appears on the
multifunction display. After five seconds, this
information disappears from the display.
In addition, the current drive program settings
are shown on the multimedia system display.
Drive programs available (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles):
Individual
Personalised settings
Comfort
Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
j Park position with parking lock
Sport
Sporty driving characteris-
k Reverse gear
tics
i Neutral
h Drive
Automatic transmission153Selecting neutral NThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.G WARNINGThe DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to itsoriginal position. The current transmission posi-If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,tion j, k, i or h is shown on the trans-they can:mission position display on the multifunctionR open doors and endanger other persons ordisplay( Y page 154).road usersEngaging park position PR climb out and be injured by the trafficDriving and parkingR operate vehicle equipment and, for exam-! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicleple, trap coasting, do not shift the automatic trans-mission directly from h to k, from k to hChildren could also set the vehicle in motion,or directly to j. Otherwise, the automaticfor example by:transmission may be damaged.R releasing the parking brakeX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in theR shifting the automatic transmission out ofdirection of arrow position PR starting the park position P automaticallyThere is a risk of an accident and position j is automatically engaged if:When leaving the vehicle, always take the keyR you switch off the engine using the key andwith you and lock the vehicle. Never leaveremove the keychildren unattended in the vehicle. AlwaysR you switch off the engine using the key orkeep the key out of reach of the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door or front-passenger doorX If the transmission is in position h or k:R you open the driver's door when the vehicle ispush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down tostationary or when driving at a very low speedthe first point of the transmission is in position h or kX If the transmission is in position j: depressUnder certain conditions, the automatic trans-the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTmission shifts automatically to transmissionlever up or down to the first point of resist-position j if the HOLD function or Dist
Automatic transmission
153
Selecting neutral N
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
G WARNING
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its
original position. The current transmission posi-
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
tion j, k, i or h is shown on the trans-
they can:
mission position display on the multifunction
R open doors and endanger other persons or
display( Y page 154).
road users
Engaging park position P
R climb out and be injured by the traffic
Driving and parking
R operate vehicle equipment and, for exam-
! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
ple, trap themselves.
is coasting, do not shift the automatic trans-
mission directly from h to k, from k to h
Children could also set the vehicle in motion,
or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic
for example by:
transmission may be damaged.
R releasing the parking brake
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the
R shifting the automatic transmission out of
direction of arrow j.
park position P
R starting the engine.
Engaging park position P automatically
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Park position j is automatically engaged if:
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
R you switch off the engine using the key and
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
remove the key
children unattended in the vehicle. Always
R you switch off the engine using the key or
keep the key out of reach of children.
using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door or front-passenger door
X If the transmission is in position h or k:
R you open the driver's door when the vehicle is
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to
stationary or when driving at a very low speed
the first point of resistance.
and the transmission is in position h or k
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
mission shifts automatically to transmission
lever up or down to the first point of resist-
position j if the HOLD function or Distance
ance.
Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the infor-
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
mation on the HOLD function ( Y page 193) and
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ( Y page 185).
mission shifts to i automatically.
With the key: if you then open the driver's door
Engaging reverse gear R
or the front-passenger door or remove the key
from the ignition lock, the automatic transmis-
! Only move the automatic transmission to
sion shifts to j automatically.
k when the vehicle is stationary.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
X If the transmission is in position h or i:
the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
the automatic transmission shifts automatically
first point of resistance.
to j.
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
If you want the automatic transmission to
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
lever up past the first point of resistance.
cle cleaned in an automatic, tow-through car
wash:
Z
Automatic transmission154With the key:The arrows on the transmission position displayshow how and into which transmission positionsX Switch the ignition can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itIf the transmission position display on the display is not working, you should pullX Shift to neutral carefully to check whether the desiredX Release the brake position is engaged. Ideally, youshould select transmission position h.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in theDriving and parkingignition positionsWith the Start/Stop button:X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-Park positionBtion safeguards the vehicle againstX Insert the key into the ignition away when stopped. Only shiftX Switch the ignition transmission into position Pwhen the vehicle is stationaryX Depress the brake pedal and keep it( Y page 166). position P is automaticallyX Shift to neutral if:X Release the brake pedal.R you switch off the engine using theX Release the electric parking and remove the keyX Switch off the ignition and leave the key in theR you switch off the engine using theignition or using the Start/Stop buttonand open the driver's door or front-Engaging drive position Dpassenger doorR you open the driver's door whenX If the transmission is in position k or i:the vehicle is stationary or whenpush the DIRECT SELECT lever down past thedriving at a very low speed whilefirst point of transmission is in position D orX If the transmission is in position j: depressRthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever down past the first point of gearCOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion R when the vehicle is position and drive pro-gram displayThe current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear on the
Automatic transmission
154
With the key:
The arrows on the transmission position display
show how and into which transmission positions
X Switch the ignition on.
you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
If the transmission position display on the mul-
depressed.
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
X Shift to neutral i.
away carefully to check whether the desired
X Release the brake pedal.
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position h.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the
Driving and parking
ignition lock.
Transmission positions
With the Start/Stop button:
X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
Park position
B
tion lock.
This safeguards the vehicle against
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
rolling away when stopped. Only shift
X Switch the ignition on.
the transmission into position P
when the vehicle is stationary
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
( Y page 166).
depressed.
Park position P is automatically
X Shift to neutral i.
engaged if:
X Release the brake pedal.
R you switch off the engine using the
X Release the electric parking brake.
key and remove the key
X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the
R you switch off the engine using the
ignition lock.
key or using the Start/Stop button
and open the driver's door or front-
Engaging drive position D
passenger door
R you open the driver's door when
X If the transmission is in position k or i:
the vehicle is stationary or when
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the
driving at a very low speed while
first point of resistance.
the transmission is in position D or
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
R
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever down past the first point of resistance.
Reverse gear
C
Only shift the transmission into posi-
tion R when the vehicle is stationary.
Transmission position and drive pro-
gram display
The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear on the multifunction display.
: Transmission position
; Gear
= Drive program
Automatic transmission155KickdownNeutralADo not shift the transmission to NUse kickdown for maximum acceleration:while driving. Otherwise, the auto-X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thematic transmission could be dam-pressure automatic transmission shifts to a lowerNo power is transmitted from thegear depending on the engine to the drive wheels.X Ease off the accelerator pedal once theReleasing the brakes will allow you todesired speed is and parkingmove the vehicle freely, e.g. to pushThe automatic transmission shifts back or tow ESP ® is deactivated or faulty: shiftGlide mode (not for Mercedes-AMGthe transmission to position N if thevehicles)vehicle is in danger of skidding, icy mode is available for diesel vehiclesIf you switch the engine off with thedepending on in position R or D, theGlide mode is characterised by the following:automatic transmission shifts to NR the combustion engine is disconnected drive train! Coasting in neutral i mayR the engine is running at idling speedcause damage to the drive train.R the gear indicated after transmission positionh disappears on the multifunction displayDrive7( Y page 154)The automatic transmission changesR transmission position h is shown in automatically. All forward gearsare mode can be activated under the followingconditions:R In the Individual drive program, the "Eco"Driving tipssetting is active. You can find informationabout this in the Digital Owner's ManualChanging gearR the speed is within a suitable rangeR the type of road is suitable, e.g. no steep uphillThe automatic transmission shifts through theor downhill gradientsindividual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position h. This is determined by:R the distance to the vehicle in front is sufficientR you are no longer depressing the acceleratorR the drive program selectedpedalR the position of th
Automatic transmission
155
Kickdown
Neutral
A
Do not shift the transmission to N
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
matic transmission could be dam-
pressure point.
aged.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
No power is transmitted from the
gear depending on the engine speed.
engine to the drive wheels.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
Releasing the brakes will allow you to
desired speed is reached.
Driving and parking
move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
it or tow it.
If ESP ® is deactivated or faulty: shift
Glide mode (not for Mercedes-AMG
the transmission to position N if the
vehicles)
vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.
on icy roads.
Glide mode is available for diesel vehicles
If you switch the engine off with the
depending on equipment.
transmission in position R or D, the
Glide mode is characterised by the following:
automatic transmission shifts to N
R the combustion engine is disconnected from
automatically.
the drive train
! Coasting in neutral i may
R the engine is running at idling speed
cause damage to the drive train.
R the gear indicated after transmission position
h disappears on the multifunction display
Drive
7
( Y page 154)
The automatic transmission changes
R transmission position h is shown in green.
gear automatically. All forward gears
are available.
Glide mode can be activated under the following
conditions:
R In the Individual drive program, the "Eco"
Driving tips
setting is active. You can find information
about this in the Digital Owner's Manual
Changing gear
R the speed is within a suitable range
R the type of road is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill
The automatic transmission shifts through the
or downhill gradients
individual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position h. This is determined by:
R the distance to the vehicle in front is sufficient
R you are no longer depressing the accelerator
R the drive program selected
pedal
R the position of the accelerator pedal
Glide mode is deactivated under the following
R the road speed
conditions:
R you depress the accelerator pedal
Accelerator pedal position
R you depress the brake pedal
Your driving style influences how the automatic
R you use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch
transmission shifts gear:
the transmission position ( Y page 152)
R little throttle: early upshifts
R you use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
change the drive program ( Y page 151)
R more throttle: late upshifts
R you activate manual gearshifting
( Y page 157)
R the distance to the vehicle in front is too short
R you leave the suitable speed range
Z
Automatic transmission156Glide mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Towing a trailerX Drive in the middle of the engine speed rangeon uphill gradients.X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient,use the left-hand steering wheel gearshiftpaddle ( Y page 157) to select a lower gear,even if cruise control, Distance PilotDISTRONIC or the speed limiter is and parkingGlide mode is available forMercedes‑AMG GLE 43 4MATIC and forDrive programsMercedes-AMG GLE 63 S 4MATIC depending onthe drive programGlide mode is characterised by the following:The Slippery drive program has the followingR the combustion engine is disconnected fromcharacteristics:the drive trainR reduced engine and transmission settings forR the engine is running at idling speedoptimum propulsion on slippery or snow-cov-R the gear indicated after transmission positionered roads.h disappears on the multifunction displayR optimised ESP ® stability control on slippery( Y page 154)or snow-covered roads.R symbol : appears.R the vehicle has improved driving stability onGlide mode can be activated under the followingslippery or snow-covered roads, for :R the Comfort drive program is activated, youComfort drive programcan find information about this in the DigitalOwner's ManualThe Comfort drive program has the followingR the speed is within a suitable :R the type of road is suitable, e.g. no steep uphillR comfort-orientated engine and transmissionor downhill .R the distance to the vehicle in front is sufficientR optimal fuel consumption resulting from theR you are no longer depressing the acceleratorautomatic transmission shifting up the vehicle pulling away more gently inGlide mode is deactivated under the followingforward and reverse gears unless the accel-conditions:erator pedal is depressed fully.R the automatic transmission shifting upR you depress the accelerator pedalsooner. This results in the vehicle being
Automatic transmission
156
Glide mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Towing a trailer
X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range
on uphill gradients.
X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient,
use the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
paddle ( Y page 157) to select a lower gear,
even if cruise control, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC or the speed limiter is activated.
Driving and parking
Glide mode is available for
Mercedes‑AMG GLE 43 4MATIC and for
Drive programs
Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S 4MATIC depending on
the equipment.
Slippery drive program
Glide mode is characterised by the following:
The Slippery drive program has the following
R the combustion engine is disconnected from
characteristics:
the drive train
R reduced engine and transmission settings for
R the engine is running at idling speed
optimum propulsion on slippery or snow-cov-
R the gear indicated after transmission position
ered roads.
h disappears on the multifunction display
R optimised ESP ® stability control on slippery
( Y page 154)
or snow-covered roads.
R symbol : appears.
R the vehicle has improved driving stability on
Glide mode can be activated under the following
slippery or snow-covered roads, for example.
conditions:
R the Comfort drive program is activated, you
Comfort drive program
can find information about this in the Digital
Owner's Manual
The Comfort drive program has the following
R the speed is within a suitable range.
characteristics:
R the type of road is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill
R comfort-orientated engine and transmission
or downhill gradients.
settings.
R the distance to the vehicle in front is sufficient
R optimal fuel consumption resulting from the
R you are no longer depressing the accelerator
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
pedal
R the vehicle pulling away more gently in
Glide mode is deactivated under the following
forward and reverse gears unless the accel-
conditions:
erator pedal is depressed fully.
R the automatic transmission shifting up
R you depress the accelerator pedal
sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven
R you depress the brake pedal
at lower engine speeds and the wheels being
R you use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch
less likely to spin.
the transmission position ( Y page 152)
R you use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
Sport drive program
change the drive program ( Y page 151)
The Sport drive program has the following char-
R you activate manual gearshifting
( Y page 157)
acteristics:
R the distance to the vehicle in front is too short
R sporty engine and transmission settings.
R you leave the suitable speed range
R the automatic transmission shifting up later.
As a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points, the fuel consumption possibly
being higher.
R the suspension exhibits sporty damping (vehi-
cles with AIRMATIC).
Automatic transmission157Drive program Sport Plus (Mercedes-To use manual gearshifting, you have twoAMG vehicles)options:R temporary settingThe Sport Plus drive program has the followingR permanent settingcharacteristics:If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-R the vehicle exhibits particularly sporty drivingfunction display will show the current of transmission position h.R the vehicle pulling away in first manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gearsR the automatic transmission shifting up and parkingwill be selected a result of the later automatic transmissionshift points, the fuel consumption possiblyTemporary settingbeing higher.R the suspension exhibits particularly firmspringing and damping settings (vehicles withAIRMATIC).R the ECO start/stop function is deactivated, itcan, however, be activated again using theECO button ( Y page 149).Individual drive programIn the Individual drive program, the followingproperties of the drive program can be selected:R the drive (engine and transmission manage-X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever toment)position h .R the transmissionX Pull steering wheel gearshift paddle : or ;.R the suspensionR all vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):The temporary setting will remain active for athe steeringcertain amount of time. Under certain condi-tions, the minimum amount of time is extended,R all vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, overrunavailability of the ECO start/stop functionmode or driving on steep select the gears in the Individual drive pro-X To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshiftgram permanently using the steering wheel pad-paddle ; and hold it in , select the permanent manual about configuring the IndividualX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift thedrive program with the multimedia system cantransmission found in the Digital
Automatic transmission
157
Drive program Sport Plus (Mercedes-
To use manual gearshifting, you have two
AMG vehicles)
options:
R temporary setting
The Sport Plus drive program has the following
R permanent setting
characteristics:
If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-
R the vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving
function display will show the current gear
characteristics.
instead of transmission position h.
R the vehicle pulling away in first gear.
If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears
R the automatic transmission shifting up later.
Driving and parking
will be selected automatically.
As a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points, the fuel consumption possibly
Temporary setting
being higher.
R the suspension exhibits particularly firm
springing and damping settings (vehicles with
AIRMATIC).
R the ECO start/stop function is deactivated, it
can, however, be activated again using the
ECO button ( Y page 149).
Individual drive program
In the Individual drive program, the following
properties of the drive program can be selected:
R the drive (engine and transmission manage-
X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
ment)
position h .
R the transmission
X Pull steering wheel gearshift paddle : or ;.
R the suspension
R all vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
The temporary setting will remain active for a
the steering
certain amount of time. Under certain condi-
tions, the minimum amount of time is extended,
R all vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, overrun
availability of the ECO start/stop function
mode or driving on steep terrain.
To select the gears in the Individual drive pro-
X To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift
gram permanently using the steering wheel pad-
paddle ; and hold it in place.
dles, select the permanent manual gearshift
program.
or
Information about configuring the Individual
X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the
drive program with the multimedia system can
transmission position.
be found in the Digital Owner's Manual.
or
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
change the drive program.
Manual gearshifting
General notes
You can shift gears yourself using the steering
wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission must
be in position h to do this.
Depending on which steering wheel gearshift
paddle is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear up or
down, if permitted.
Z
Automatic transmission158Permanent setting (all vehicles exceptShifting gearsMercedes-AMG vehicles)! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatictransmission does not shift up automaticallyeven when the engine limiting speed for thecurrent gear is reached. When the engine lim-iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut toprevent the engine from overrevving. Alwaysmake sure that the engine speed does notDriving and parkingreach the red area of the rev counter. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever toposition h .X Press button :.X To deactivate: press button :.orX Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller tochange the drive program.X To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift pad-dle ;.Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMGThe automatic transmission shifts up to thevehicles)next vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): if the maximum engine speed in thegear currently engaged is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatic trans-mission automatically shifts up to preventengine damage.X To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshiftpaddle :.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next downshifting occurs when coast-ing.X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever toIf the engine were to exceed the maximumposition h .engine speed when shifting down, the auto-matic transmission protects against engineX Press button :.damage by not shifting lamp ; lights up.X To deactivate: press button :.orX Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller toswitch to the Individual drive lamp ; goes out.
Automatic transmission
158
Permanent setting (all vehicles except
Shifting gears
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic
transmission does not shift up automatically
even when the engine limiting speed for the
current gear is reached. When the engine lim-
iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
Driving and parking
reach the red area of the rev counter. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
position h .
X Press button :.
X To deactivate: press button :.
or
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
change the drive program.
X To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift pad-
dle ;.
Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
vehicles)
next gear.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): if the maximum engine speed in the
gear currently engaged is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic trans-
mission automatically shifts up to prevent
engine damage.
X To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Automatic downshifting occurs when coast-
ing.
X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
If the engine were to exceed the maximum
position h .
engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
matic transmission protects against engine
X Press button :.
damage by not shifting down.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X To deactivate: press button :.
or
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
switch to the Individual drive program.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
Automatic transmission159Gearshift recommendationBefore the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown on the multi-function display.X When the UP message appears on the multi-function display, pull on the right-hand steer-ing wheel gearshift and parkingMercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is possibleThe gearshift recommendation assists you inonly in the temporary a fuel-efficient driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown on the multifunctionX For maximum acceleration, depress pedal beyond the pressure automatic transmission shifts to a lowerX When gearshift recommendation : is showngear depending on the engine the multifunction display of the instrumentX Shift back up once the desired speed iscluster, shift to recommended gear ;. (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)During kickdown, you cannot shift gears usingthe steering wheel gearshift paddles.! In manual mode, the automatic transmis-If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-sion does not shift up automatically evenmission shifts up to the next gear when thewhen the engine limiting speed for the currentmaximum engine speed is reached. This pre-gear is reached. When the engine limitingvents the engine from is reached, the fuel supply is cut toprevent the engine from overrevving. Alwaysmake sure that the engine speed does notreach the red area of the rev counter. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.: Gear indicator; Upshift indicatorZ
Automatic transmission
159
Gearshift recommendation
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown on the multi-
function display.
X When the UP message appears on the multi-
function display, pull on the right-hand steer-
ing wheel gearshift paddle.
Kickdown
Driving and parking
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is possible
The gearshift recommendation assists you in
only in the temporary setting.
adopting a fuel-efficient driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown on the multifunction
X For maximum acceleration, depress the
display.
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
X When gearshift recommendation : is shown
gear depending on the engine speed.
on the multifunction display of the instrument
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
cluster, shift to recommended gear ;.
reached.
Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
the steering wheel gearshift paddles.
! In manual mode, the automatic transmis-
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
sion does not shift up automatically even
mission shifts up to the next gear when the
when the engine limiting speed for the current
maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
gear is reached. When the engine limiting
vents the engine from overrevving.
speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the rev counter. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
: Gear indicator
; Upshift indicator
Z
Refuelling160Problems with the transmissionProblemPossible causes/consequences and M SolutionsThe transmission hasThe transmission is losing shifting gear.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.7G-TRONIC:The transmission is in emergency and parkingThe acceleration ability It is possible to shift to second gear and reverse gear deteriorating.X transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position shifts gear.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or D is selected, the transmission shifts to second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts to reverse gear.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.9G-TRONIC:The transmission is in emergency acceleration ability It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is inposition transmission no lon- X shifts gear.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist not swallow fuel or let it come into contactwith skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuelImportant safety notesvapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil-G you or others come into contact with fuel,Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelobserve the following:incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.R Wash the fuel off any affected areas of skinwith water and soap must avoid fire, naked flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineR If you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor-and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforeoughly with clean water immediately. medical attention.R If fuel is swallowed, seek i
Refuelling
160
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission has
The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
7G-TRONIC:
The transmission is in emergency mode.
Driving and parking
The acceleration ability It is possible to shift to second gear and reverse gear only.
is deteriorating.
X Stop.
The transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position P.
ger shifts gear.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts to second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts to reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
9G-TRONIC:
The transmission is in emergency mode.
The acceleration ability It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is in
position N.
is deteriorating.
The transmission no lon- X Stop.
ger shifts gear.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Refuelling
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel
Important safety notes
vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil-
G WARNING
dren.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
observe the following:
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion.
R Wash the fuel off any affected areas of skin
with water and soap immediately.
You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
R If you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor-
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
oughly with clean water immediately. Seek
refuelling.
immediate medical attention.
R If fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi-
G WARNING
cal attention. Do not induce vomiting.
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health.
R Change any clothing that has come into
There is a danger of injury.
contact with fuel immediately.
Refuelling161G WARNINGDo not get back into the vehicle during the refu-elling process, Otherwise, electrostatic chargeElectrostatic charge can cause sparks andcould build up ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk ofIf you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may sprayfire and when you remove the fuel pump touch the vehicle body before openingFurther information on fuel and fuel quality( Y page 388).the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. This discharges any electrostaticcharge that may have built and parkingRefuellingG WARNINGGeneral informationVehicles with a diesel engine:Observe the important safety notesIf you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash( Y page 160).point of this fuel mixture is lower than that ofIf you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running,the fuel filler flap also unlocks/ in the exhaust system may over-The position of the 8 fuel filler cap is dis-heat unnoticed. There is a risk of on the instrument cluster. The arrow nextto the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to refuel! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with adiesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition ifX Switch off the accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.X Remove the key from the ignition , fuel can enter the fuel small amounts of the wrong fuel couldor, in vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:result in damage to the fuel system and theX Open the driver's . The repair costs are high. Notify aThe vehicle electronics are now in positionqualified specialist workshop and have theg. This is the same as the key having beenfuel tank and fuel lines drained driver's door can be closed again.! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with apetrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition ifyou accidentally refuel with the wrong fu
Refuelling
161
G WARNING
Do not get back into the vehicle during the refu-
elling process, Otherwise, electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and
could build up again.
thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of
If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray
fire and explosion.
out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
Further information on fuel and fuel quality
( Y page 388).
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic
charge that may have built up.
Driving and parking
Refuelling
G WARNING
General information
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Observe the important safety notes
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash
( Y page 160).
point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of
If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,
pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running,
the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.
components in the exhaust system may over-
The position of the 8 fuel filler cap is dis-
heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.
played on the instrument cluster. The arrow next
to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-
Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to
cle.
diesel fuel.
Preparing to refuel
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if
X Switch off the engine.
you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
result in damage to the fuel system and the
X Open the driver's door.
engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a
The vehicle electronics are now in position
qualified specialist workshop and have the
g. This is the same as the key having been
fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
removed.
The driver's door can be closed again.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if
you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Opening the fuel filler flap
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.
: Open the fuel filler flap
The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system
; Insert the fuel filler cap
could otherwise be blocked by particles from
= Instruction label indicating the fuel type to
the fuel can.
be refuelled
? Tyre pressure table
Z
Refuelling162Closing the fuel filler flapX Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow :.X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnThe fuel filler flap swings until it engages audibly.X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise andX Close the fuel filler it.X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderClose the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-bracket on the inside of the filler flap in of arrow ;.If you drive at speeds above 2 km/h with the fuelfiller flap open, the Fuel filler flap openX Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelDriving and parkingpump nozzle into the tank, hook in place andmessage is shown on the multifunction .i Further information on warning and indica-X Fill the tank only until the pump nozzletor lamps on the instrument clusterswitches off.( Y page 298).Do not add any more fuel after the pump stopsfilling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel mayleak with a diesel engine: the filler neck isdesigned for refuelling at diesel filling pumps.
Refuelling
162
Closing the fuel filler flap
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
The fuel filler flap swings open.
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and
X Close the fuel filler flap.
remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-
bracket on the inside of the filler flap in the
cle.
direction of arrow ;.
If you drive at speeds above 2 km/h with the fuel
filler flap open, the Fuel filler flap open
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
Driving and parking
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
message is shown on the multifunction display.
refuel.
i Further information on warning and indica-
X Fill the tank only until the pump nozzle
tor lamps on the instrument cluster
switches off.
( Y page 298).
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may
leak out.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is
designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps.
Refuelling163Problems with the fuel and fuel tankProblemPossible causes/consequences and M SolutionsFuel is leaking from theG fuel line or the fuel tank is is a risk of fire or explosion.X Apply the electric parking and parkingX Switch off the engine.X Remove the key from the ignition , on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's vehicle electronics are now in key position u. This is the sameas the key having been removed.X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist engine does notThe fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run .X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel.X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds ( Y page 144).X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until itruns the engine does not start:X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds( Y page 144).X Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten secondsuntil it runs the engine does not start after three attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not opened.X Unlock the vehicle ( Y page 83).The key battery is weak or discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element ( Y page 85).The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.X Consult a qualified specialist the supply of AdBlue ® is down to approx-AdBlue ® (BlueTEC vehicles only)imately 7.0 l, the Top Up AdBlue See Own‐er's Manual message is shown on the multi-General notesfunction function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas after-X Add at least 7.5 l of AdBlue ® .treatment must be operated with AdBlue ®X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 agent. Topping up AdBlue ® is part ofX Start the work.Z
Refuelling
163
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the
G WARNING
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
There is a risk of fire or explosion.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
Driving and parking
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
Or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in key position u. This is the same
as the key having been removed.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely
start.
dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds ( Y page 144).
X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it
runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds
( Y page 144).
X Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten seconds
until it runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened.
X Unlock the vehicle ( Y page 83).
The key battery is weak or discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element ( Y page 85).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
When the supply of AdBlue ® is down to approx-
AdBlue ® (BlueTEC vehicles only)
imately 7.0 l, the Top Up AdBlue See Own‐
er's Manual message is shown on the multi-
General notes
function display.
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas after-
X Add at least 7.5 l of AdBlue ® .
treatment must be operated with AdBlue ®
X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds.
reducing agent. Topping up AdBlue ® is part of
X Start the engine.
maintenance work.
Z
Refuelling164i You can also have the AdBlue ® tank refilledAdBlue ® tank can only be filled as intendedat a qualified specialist the vehicle parked on a level in capacity will thus be driving your vehicle outside Europe, haveFilling a vehicle standing on an uneven sur-the AdBlue ® supply checked at a qualified spe-face is not permitted. There is a danger ofcialist , which can cause damage to Blue-Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gasTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and about AdBlue ® can be! Immediately rinse off surfaces which comeobtained from any Mercedes-Benz ServiceDriving and parkinginto contact with AdBlue ® when topping up AdBlue ® with a damp cloth and coldwater. If AdBlue ® has already crystallised,Important safety notesclean using a sponge and cold water. AdBlue ®AdBlue ® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaustresidue crystallises after a short period andgas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:contaminates the affected surfaces. Further-more, electrical components in the vicinityR non-toxicmay be damaged by AdBlue ® .R colourless and odourless! AdBlue ® is not a fuel additive and must notR non-flammablebe added to the fuel tank. If AdBlue ® is addedIf you open the AdBlue ® tank, small amounts ofto the fuel tank, this can lead to engine dam-ammonia vapour may be vapours have a pungent odour and areparticularly irritating to the skin, mucous mem-Have the AdBlue ® tank refilled at a qualifiedbranes and eyes. You may experience a burningspecialist workshop. However, you can also topsensation in your eyes, nose and throat. Youup the AdBlue ® tank:may also experience coughing and watery eyes.R at a filling station with an AdBlue ® filling pumpDo not inhale any ammonia vapours that may beR with AdBlue ® refill bottlesreleased. Fill the AdBlue ® tank only in well-ven-R with an AdBlue ® refill canistertilated th
Refuelling
164
i You can also have the AdBlue ® tank refilled
AdBlue ® tank can only be filled as intended
at a qualified specialist workshop.
with the vehicle parked on a level surface.
Fluctuations in capacity will thus be avoided.
Before driving your vehicle outside Europe, have
Filling a vehicle standing on an uneven sur-
the AdBlue ® supply checked at a qualified spe-
face is not permitted. There is a danger of
cialist workshop.
overfilling, which can cause damage to Blue-
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas
TEC exhaust gas aftertreatment components.
aftertreatment and about AdBlue ® can be
! Immediately rinse off surfaces which come
obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Driving and parking
into contact with AdBlue ® when topping up or
Centre.
remove AdBlue ® with a damp cloth and cold
water. If AdBlue ® has already crystallised,
Important safety notes
clean using a sponge and cold water. AdBlue ®
AdBlue ® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
residue crystallises after a short period and
gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
contaminates the affected surfaces. Further-
more, electrical components in the vicinity
R non-toxic
may be damaged by AdBlue ® .
R colourless and odourless
! AdBlue ® is not a fuel additive and must not
R non-flammable
be added to the fuel tank. If AdBlue ® is added
If you open the AdBlue ® tank, small amounts of
to the fuel tank, this can lead to engine dam-
ammonia vapour may be released.
age.
Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour and are
particularly irritating to the skin, mucous mem-
Have the AdBlue ® tank refilled at a qualified
branes and eyes. You may experience a burning
specialist workshop. However, you can also top
sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. You
up the AdBlue ® tank:
may also experience coughing and watery eyes.
R at a filling station with an AdBlue ® filling pump
Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be
R with AdBlue ® refill bottles
released. Fill the AdBlue ® tank only in well-ven-
R with an AdBlue ® refill canister
tilated areas.
When the pump nozzle switches off automati-
Do not swallow AdBlue ® or let it come into con-
cally during filling at a filling pump, the AdBlue ®
tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Keep AdBlue ®
tank has been completely filled. Do not fill the
away from children.
AdBlue ® tank any further. AdBlue ® may leak
If you or others come into contact with AdBlue ® ,
out.
observe the following:
To avoid transporting already opened refill con-
R Immediately rinse AdBlue ® off your skin with
tainers in the vehicle, completely empty refill
soap and water.
bottles or canisters when filling the AdBlue ®
R If AdBlue ® comes into contact with your eyes,
tank, if possible.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean
Further information on AdBlue ® ( Y page 390).
water. Seek medical attention at once.
R If AdBlue ® is swallowed, immediately rinse
your mouth out thoroughly. Drink plenty of
water. Seek medical attention at once.
R Immediately change out of clothing that has
come into contact with AdBlue ® .
! Only use AdBlue ® in accordance with
ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with
AdBlue ® , and do not dilute AdBlue ® with
water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust
gas aftertreatment system.
! In order to fill the AdBlue ® tank, the vehicle
must be parked on a level surface. The
Refuelling165Opening/closing the AdBlue ® filler capDriving and parkingX Unscrew the cap from the opening on top ofAdBlue ® refill canister ;.The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-X Place disposable hose : on the opening ofmatically when you open or close the vehicleAdBlue ® refill canister ; and screw it onwith the key or using until hand-tight.X To open: switch the ignition hose : remains closed until youX Press the fuel filler flap in the direction offasten disposable hose : to the AdBlue ®arrow :.filler neck of the fuel filler flap swings open.X Turn blue AdBlue ® fuel filler cap ; anti-clock-wise and remove ® filler cap ; is secured with a plasticstrip.X To close: fit AdBlue ® filler cap ; on the fillerneck and turn it clockwise.X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in thedirection of arrow :.X Drive at a speed greater than 15 km/ Top Up AdBlue See Owner's Manualmessage disappears after approximately oneminute.X Place disposable hose : on the filler neck oni If the Top Up AdBlue See Owner's Man‐the vehicle and screw it on clockwise untilual message continues to be shown on thehand-tight. When you feel resistance, dispos-able hose : is sufficiently display, you must top up withmore AdBlue ® .X Lift up and tip AdBlue ® refill canister ;.Filling stops when the AdBlue ® tank is com-pletely filled. Do not fill the AdBlue ® tank anyAdBlue ® refill canistersfurther. AdBlue ® refill canister ; can be! Do not tighten the disposable hose tooremoved when it has been only partially emp-firmly. The disposable hose could damaged and AdBlue ® may leak out.X Turn disposable hose : on the filler neck ofthe vehicle anti-clockwise and remove it.X Turn disposable hose : on the opening ofAdBlue ® refill canister ; anti-clockwise andremove it.X Reseal AdBlue ® refill canister ; with the ® refill canisters are available at manyfilling stations or at a qualifi
Refuelling
165
Opening/closing the AdBlue ® filler cap
Driving and parking
X Unscrew the cap from the opening on top of
AdBlue ® refill canister ;.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
X Place disposable hose : on the opening of
matically when you open or close the vehicle
AdBlue ® refill canister ; and screw it on
with the key or using KEYLESS-GO.
clockwise until hand-tight.
X To open: switch the ignition off.
Disposable hose : remains closed until you
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
fasten disposable hose : to the AdBlue ®
arrow :.
filler neck of the vehicle.
The fuel filler flap swings open.
X Turn blue AdBlue ® fuel filler cap ; anti-clock-
wise and remove it.
AdBlue ® filler cap ; is secured with a plastic
strip.
X To close: fit AdBlue ® filler cap ; on the filler
neck and turn it clockwise.
X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the
direction of arrow :.
X Drive at a speed greater than 15 km/h.
The Top Up AdBlue See Owner's Manual
message disappears after approximately one
minute.
X Place disposable hose : on the filler neck on
i If the Top Up AdBlue See Owner's Man‐
the vehicle and screw it on clockwise until
ual message continues to be shown on the
hand-tight. When you feel resistance, dispos-
able hose : is sufficiently secured.
multifunction display, you must top up with
more AdBlue ® .
X Lift up and tip AdBlue ® refill canister ;.
Filling stops when the AdBlue ® tank is com-
pletely filled. Do not fill the AdBlue ® tank any
AdBlue ® refill canisters
further. AdBlue ® refill canister ; can be
! Do not tighten the disposable hose too
removed when it has been only partially emp-
firmly. The disposable hose could otherwise
tied.
be damaged and AdBlue ® may leak out.
X Turn disposable hose : on the filler neck of
the vehicle anti-clockwise and remove it.
X Turn disposable hose : on the opening of
AdBlue ® refill canister ; anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X Reseal AdBlue ® refill canister ; with the cap.
AdBlue ® refill canisters are available at many
filling stations or at a qualified specialist work-
shop. AdBlue ® refill canisters are often sold with
Z
Parking166a filler hose. A filler hose that does not exactly fitresult of overfilling. Mercedes-Benz offers spe-cial refill bottles with a threaded cap. These arethe vehicle's AdBlue ® tank offers no overfill pro-available at any Mercedes-Benz Service . AdBlue ® may leak out as a result ofoverfilling. Mercedes-Benz offers a special dis-posable hose with overfill protection. You canobtain this from any Mercedes-Benz ServiceParkingCentre. AdBlue ® is available in a variety of con-Important safety notestainers and receptacles. Use the disposablehose only with the Mercedes-Benz AdBlue ® refillDriving and parkingG material such as leaves, grass orAdBlue ® refill bottletwigs may ignite if they come into contact withhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust! Only screw on the AdBlue ® refill bottle sogas flow. There is a risk of it is hand-tight. Otherwise, the thread ofPark the vehicle so that no flammable mate-the AdBlue ® refill bottle could be damagedrial can come into contact with hot vehicleand AdBlue ® could leak . In particular, do not park on drygrassland or harvested grain fields.G WARNINGIf you leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, they may be able to set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:R release the parking brakeR shift the automatic transmission out of parkposition PR start the engineX Unscrew the protective cap from AdBlue ®In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-refill bottle :.ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofX Place AdBlue ® refill bottle : on the filleran accident and as shown and screw it on clockwise leaving the vehicle, always take the keyX Press AdBlue ® refill bottle : towards thewith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavefiller unattended in the AdBlue ® tank is filled. This could take upto one minute.! Always secure the vehicle correctly againstrolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-i Wh
Parking
166
a filler hose. A filler hose that does not exactly fit
result of overfilling. Mercedes-Benz offers spe-
cial refill bottles with a threaded cap. These are
the vehicle's AdBlue ® tank offers no overfill pro-
available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
tection. AdBlue ® may leak out as a result of
overfilling. Mercedes-Benz offers a special dis-
posable hose with overfill protection. You can
obtain this from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Parking
Centre. AdBlue ® is available in a variety of con-
Important safety notes
tainers and receptacles. Use the disposable
hose only with the Mercedes-Benz AdBlue ® refill
Driving and parking
G WARNING
canisters.
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
AdBlue ® refill bottle
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
! Only screw on the AdBlue ® refill bottle so
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
that it is hand-tight. Otherwise, the thread of
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
the AdBlue ® refill bottle could be damaged
rial can come into contact with hot vehicle
and AdBlue ® could leak out.
components. In particular, do not park on dry
grassland or harvested grain fields.
G WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the vehi-
cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R release the parking brake
R shift the automatic transmission out of park
position P
R start the engine
X Unscrew the protective cap from AdBlue ®
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
refill bottle :.
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
X Place AdBlue ® refill bottle : on the filler
an accident and injury.
neck as shown and screw it on clockwise until
hand-tight.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
X Press AdBlue ® refill bottle : towards the
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
filler neck.
children unattended in the vehicle.
The AdBlue ® tank is filled. This could take up
to one minute.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly against
rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
i When AdBlue ® refill bottle : is no longer
etrain could be damaged.
pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be
taken off again after being only partially emp-
To ensure that the vehicle is safeguarded
tied.
against rolling away unintentionally:
X Release AdBlue ® refill bottle :.
R the electric parking brake must be applied.
X Turn AdBlue ® refill bottle : anti-clockwise
R the transmission must be in position j and
and remove it.
the key must be removed from the ignition
lock
X Screw the protective cap onto AdBlue ® refill
bottle : again.
R the front wheels must be turned towards the
kerb on steep uphill or downhill gradients
AdBlue ® refill bottles are available at many fill-
ing stations or at a qualified specialist work-
shop. Refill bottles without a threaded seal offer
no overfill protection. AdBlue ® may leak out as a
Parking167R an empty vehicle must be secured at the frontX Release the electric parking with a wheel chock or similar object, forX Switch off the ignition and leave the key in theexample, on uphill or downhill gradientsignition lock.R a laden vehicle must also be secured at thei The engine can be switched off while therear axle with a wheel chock or similar object,vehicle is in motion by pressing and holdingfor example, on uphill or downhill gradientsthe Start/Stop button for about three sec-onds. This function operates independently ofthe ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-Switching off the engineoff and parkingG WARNINGElectric parking brakeThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral position N when you switch off the notesThe vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.G WARNINGAfter switching off the engine, always switchIf you leave children unattended in the vehi-to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-cle, they may be able to set the vehicle incle from rolling away by applying the parkingmotion if, for example, they:brake.R release the parking brakeX Apply the electric parking brake.R shift the automatic transmission out of parkX Shift the transmission to position PX With the key: turn the key to key position uR start the enginein the ignition lock and remove addition, they may operate vehicle equip-The immobiliser is and become trapped. There is a risk ofX With KEYLESS-GO:an accident and the Start/Stop button ( Y page 144).When leaving the vehicle, always take the keyThe engine stops and all the indicator lampson the instrument cluster go you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-The function of the electric parking brake ismission shifts to i on the on-board voltage. If the on-If you then open t
Parking
167
R an empty vehicle must be secured at the front
X Release the electric parking brake.
axle with a wheel chock or similar object, for
X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the
example, on uphill or downhill gradients
ignition lock.
R a laden vehicle must also be secured at the
i The engine can be switched off while the
rear axle with a wheel chock or similar object,
vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
for example, on uphill or downhill gradients
the Start/Stop button for about three sec-
onds. This function operates independently of
the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-
Switching off the engine
off function.
Driving and parking
G WARNING
Electric parking brake
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
General notes
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
G WARNING
After switching off the engine, always switch
If you leave children unattended in the vehi-
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
motion if, for example, they:
brake.
R release the parking brake
X Apply the electric parking brake.
R shift the automatic transmission out of park
X Shift the transmission to position j.
position P
X With the key: turn the key to key position u
R start the engine
in the ignition lock and remove it.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
The immobiliser is activated.
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
X With KEYLESS-GO:
an accident and injury.
Press the Start/Stop button ( Y page 144).
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps
on the instrument cluster go out.
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
children unattended in the vehicle.
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
The function of the electric parking brake is
mission shifts to i automatically.
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
If you then open the driver's door or the front-
board voltage is low or the system is malfunc-
passenger door, the automatic transmission
tioning, it may not be possible to apply the
shifts automatically to j.
released parking brake.
If you want the automatic transmission to
X If this is the case, park the vehicle only on
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
level ground and secure it to prevent it from
cle cleaned in an automatic, tow-through car
rolling away.
wash:
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
X Vehicles with a key: switch on the ignition.
j.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
It may not be possible to release an applied
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or if
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
X Switch the ignition on.
qualified specialist workshop.
X All vehicles: depress the brake pedal and
i The electric parking brake carries out a func-
keep it depressed.
tion check at regular intervals when the
X Shift to neutral i.
engine is switched off. Noises that occur are
X Release the brake pedal.
normal.
Z
Parking168Applying or releasing manuallyIn addition, at least one of the following condi-tions must be fulfilled:R the engine is switched offR the driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is openedR there is a system malfunctionR the power supply is insufficientR the vehicle is stationary for a lengthy periodDriving and parkingThe red ! indicator lamp on the instrumentcluster lights electric parking brake is not automaticallyapplied if the engine is switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.X To apply: push handle :.When the electric parking brake is applied,Releasing automaticallythe red ! indicator lamp lights up on theinstrument electric parking brake is released automat-i The electric parking brake can also beically when all of the following conditions areapplied when the key is :X To release: pull handle :.R the engine is runningThe red ! indicator lamp on the instru-R the seat belt tongue is engaged in the beltment cluster goes The electric parking brake can be releasedR the transmission is in position h or k andonly:you depress the accelerator pedal or, on alevel surface, shift from transmission positionR if the key is in key position 1 in the ignitionj to h or klock ( Y page 144) orR if the transmission is in position k, the bootR if the ignition was switched on using thelid must be buttonIf the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seatTo ensure that you do not roll backwards whenbelt buckle, the following conditions must bepulling away on an uphill slope, apply the electricfulfilled:parking brake ( Y page 147).R the driver's door is closedApplying automaticallyR you are shifting from transmission positionj or have previously driven at speedsThe electric parking brake is automaticallygreater than 3 km/ when the transmission is in position jR if the transmission is in position k, the bootandlid must be closed.R the engine is switched off orWhen the electric parking bra
Parking
168
Applying or releasing manually
In addition, at least one of the following condi-
tions must be fulfilled:
R the engine is switched off
R the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
R there is a system malfunction
R the power supply is insufficient
R the vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period
Driving and parking
The red ! indicator lamp on the instrument
cluster lights up.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
X To apply: push handle :.
When the electric parking brake is applied,
Releasing automatically
the red ! indicator lamp lights up on the
instrument cluster.
The electric parking brake is released automat-
i The electric parking brake can also be
ically when all of the following conditions are
applied when the key is removed.
fulfilled:
X To release: pull handle :.
R the engine is running
The red ! indicator lamp on the instru-
R the seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt
ment cluster goes out.
buckle
i The electric parking brake can be released
R the transmission is in position h or k and
only:
you depress the accelerator pedal or, on a
level surface, shift from transmission position
R if the key is in key position 1 in the ignition
j to h or k
lock ( Y page 144) or
R if the transmission is in position k, the boot
R if the ignition was switched on using the
lid must be closed.
Start/Stop button
If the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seat
To ensure that you do not roll backwards when
belt buckle, the following conditions must be
pulling away on an uphill slope, apply the electric
fulfilled:
parking brake ( Y page 147).
R the driver's door is closed
Applying automatically
R you are shifting from transmission position
j or have previously driven at speeds
The electric parking brake is automatically
greater than 3 km/h.
applied when the transmission is in position j
R if the transmission is in position k, the boot
and
lid must be closed.
R the engine is switched off or
When the electric parking brake is released,
R the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
the ! indicator lamp goes out on the instru-
driver's door is opened
ment cluster.
To prevent the electric parking brake from being
applied automatically, pull handle :.
The electric parking brake is also applied auto-
matically if:
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle
to a standstill or
R the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary or
R Parking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary
Driving tips169Emergency brakingDriving tipsGeneral notesImportant safety notesG WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availableDriving and parkingwith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskThe vehicle can also be braked during an emer-of an by using the electric parking not switch off the ignition while driving.X While driving, push handle : of the electricparking sensibly – save fuelThe vehicle is braked for as long as the handleof the electric parking brake is pressed. TheObserve the following tips to save fuel:longer the electric parking brake handle isX The tyres should always be inflated to the rec-depressed, the greater the braking tyre braking:X Remove unnecessary loads.R a warning tone soundsX Remove roof carriers when they are not nee-R the Release park. brake message appearsded.R the red ! indicator lamp on the instrumentX Warm up the engine at low engine flashesX Avoid frequent acceleration or the vehicle has been braked to a stand-X Have all service and maintenance work car-still, the electric parking brake is out at the specified consumption also increases when driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic, on short jour-Parking up the vehicleneys and in hilly you leave the vehicle parked up for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byECO displayheavy you leave the vehicle parked up for longer thanThe ECO display shows you how economicalsix weeks, it may suffer from lack of driving style is. The ECO display assists youX Contact a qualified specialist workshop andin achieving the most economical driving styleseek the selected settings and prevailing condi-tions. Consumption can be sig
Driving tips
169
Emergency braking
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
Driving and parking
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
The vehicle can also be braked during an emer-
of an accident.
gency by using the electric parking brake.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
X While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
The vehicle is braked for as long as the handle
of the electric parking brake is pressed. The
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
longer the electric parking brake handle is
X The tyres should always be inflated to the rec-
depressed, the greater the braking force.
ommended tyre pressure.
During braking:
X Remove unnecessary loads.
R a warning tone sounds
X Remove roof carriers when they are not nee-
R the Release park. brake message appears
ded.
R the red ! indicator lamp on the instrument
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
cluster flashes
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
X Have all service and maintenance work car-
still, the electric parking brake is applied.
ried out at the specified intervals.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
cold weather, in stop-start traffic, on short jour-
Parking up the vehicle
neys and in hilly terrain.
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
ECO display
heavy discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than
The ECO display shows you how economical
six weeks, it may suffer from lack of use.
your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and
in achieving the most economical driving style
seek advice.
for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
tions. Consumption can be significantly influ-
i You can obtain information on trickle charg-
enced by your driving style.
ers from a qualified specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid vehicles: observe the notes on
the high-voltage battery in the separate Owner's
Manual.
: Acceleration
; Coasting
Z
Driving tips170At the beginning of the journey, the three outer= Constantareas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-? Additional range achievednomical driving. A higher level indicates a moreRange ? is shown under Bonus fr. start andeconomical driving style. If the three outer areasrepresents the additional range achieved sinceare completely filled at the same time, the driverthe beginning of the journey as a result of anhas adopted the most economical driving styleadapted driving the selected settings and prevailing condi-If the fuel level has dropped into the reservetions. The ECO display border lights , the Reserve fuel message is shown inThe ECO display does not indicate the actual fuelDriving and parkingthe multifunction display instead of range ?. Inconsumption. The additionally achieved rangedisplayed under Bonus fr. start does notaddition, the 8 warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up ( Y page 298).indicate a fixed consumption ECO display consists of three sections, withIn addition to driving style, the actual consump-an inner and outer area. The sections corre-tion is affected by other factors, such as:spond to the following three categories:R loadAcceleration (evaluation of all accel-R tyre pressure:eration processes):R cold startR the outer area fills up and the innerR choice of routearea lights up green: moderateR the use of electrical consumersacceleration, especially at higherThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-speedsplay.R the outer area empties and theAn economical driving style involves driving at ainner area is grey: sporty acceler-moderate engine achieve a higher value in the categoriesCoasting (evaluation of all decelera-"Acceleration" and "Constant":;tion processes):R observe the gearshift recommendationR the outer area fills up and the innerR drive the vehicle in the Comfort drive pro-area lights up green: , keeping your distance andOn long journeys at
Driving tips
170
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer
= Constant
areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-
? Additional range achieved
nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more
Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. start and
economical driving style. If the three outer areas
represents the additional range achieved since
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
the beginning of the journey as a result of an
has adopted the most economical driving style
adapted driving style.
for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve
tions. The ECO display border lights up.
range, the Reserve fuel message is shown in
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel
Driving and parking
the multifunction display instead of range ?. In
consumption. The additionally achieved range
displayed under Bonus fr. start does not
addition, the 8 warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up ( Y page 298).
indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
The ECO display consists of three sections, with
In addition to driving style, the actual consump-
an inner and outer area. The sections corre-
tion is affected by other factors, such as:
spond to the following three categories:
R load
Acceleration (evaluation of all accel-
R tyre pressure
:
eration processes):
R cold start
R the outer area fills up and the inner
R choice of route
area lights up green: moderate
R the use of electrical consumers
acceleration, especially at higher
These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
speeds
play.
R the outer area empties and the
An economical driving style involves driving at a
inner area is grey: sporty acceler-
moderate engine speed.
ation
To achieve a higher value in the categories
Coasting (evaluation of all decelera-
"Acceleration" and "Constant":
;
tion processes):
R observe the gearshift recommendation
R the outer area fills up and the inner
R drive the vehicle in the Comfort drive pro-
area lights up green: anticipatory
gram.
driving, keeping your distance and
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the
early release of the accelerator.
motorway, only the outer area for "Constant"
The vehicle can coast without use
will change.
of the brakes.
The ECO display summarises the driving style
R the outer area empties and the
from the start of the journey to its completion.
inner area is grey: frequent heavy
Therefore, there are more marked changes in
braking
the outer areas at the start of a journey. During
a prolonged driving time, these changes are
Constant (continuous evaluation
=
smaller. For more marked changes, perform a
over the entire journey):
manual reset ( Y page 245).
R the outer area fills up and the inner
Further information on the ECO display
area lights up green: constant
( Y page 245).
speed and avoidance of unneces-
sary acceleration and deceleration
R the outer area empties and the
Brakes
inner area is grey: fluctuations in
speed
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The three inner areas display the current driving
style and light up green as a result of a particu-
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
larly economical driving style. Depending on the
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
driving situation, up to two areas may light up
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
simultaneously.
Driving tips171Wet road surfacesThis increases the risk of skidding and havingan you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayed reac-Do not shift down for additional engine brak-tion from the brakes when braking for the firsting on a slippery road . This may also occur after a car wash orafter driving through deep gradientsYou will have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicleDo not depress the brake pedal continuouslyDriving and parkingin the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never causeAfter driving on a wet road or having the vehiclethe brakes to rub by constantly applying lightwashed, brake firmly while paying attention topressure to the pedal. This results in excessivethe traffic conditions. This will warm up theand premature wear to the brake discs, thereby drying them more quicklyUse the left-hand gearshift paddle to shift to aand protecting them against gear on long and steep downhill particular note of this when driving a ladenLimited braking performance on roadsThis also applies if you have activated cruisecontrol, the speed limiter or Distance PilotIf you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of form on the brake discs and pads. This canThis will use the braking effect of the engine, soincrease the braking distance braking will be required to maintain theR Apply the brakes occasionally in order to pre-vehicle speed. This relieves the load on thevent any salt build-up. Ensure that you do notbrake system and prevents the brakes fromendanger other road users when doing and wearing too quickly.R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the endof the journey and when starting the nextHeavy and light loadsjourney.G WARNINGR Maintain a much greater distance to the vehi-cle in braking system can overheat if you leaveyour foot
Driving tips
171
Wet road surfaces
This increases the risk of skidding and having
an accident.
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
ing on a slippery road surface.
time. This may also occur after a car wash or
after driving through deep water.
Downhill gradients
You will have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously
Driving and parking
in front.
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
the brakes to rub by constantly applying light
washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
pressure to the pedal. This results in excessive
the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
and premature wear to the brake pads.
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
Use the left-hand gearshift paddle to shift to a
and protecting them against corrosion.
lower gear on long and steep downhill gradients.
Take particular note of this when driving a laden
Limited braking performance on salt-
vehicle.
treated roads
This also applies if you have activated cruise
control, the speed limiter or Distance Pilot
If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt
DISTRONIC.
may form on the brake discs and pads. This can
This will use the braking effect of the engine, so
increase the braking distance considerably.
less braking will be required to maintain the
R Apply the brakes occasionally in order to pre-
vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the
vent any salt build-up. Ensure that you do not
brake system and prevents the brakes from
endanger other road users when doing so.
overheating and wearing too quickly.
R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next
Heavy and light loads
journey.
G WARNING
R Maintain a much greater distance to the vehi-
cle in front.
The braking system can overheat if you leave
your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
New brake pads/linings
This increases the braking distance and could
Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new
even cause the braking system to fail. There is
or have been replaced only achieve optimum
a risk of an accident.
braking effect after several hundred kilometres
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do
of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking
not simultaneously depress both the brake
effect by applying greater force to the brake
pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.
pedal.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
mends that you only have brake pads/linings
results in excessive and premature wear to
fitted to your vehicle which have been approved
the brake pads.
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which corre-
spond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
If heavy demands are made on the brakes, do
pads/linings which have not been approved for
not park the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an
short while. This allows the airflow to cool the
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
brakes more quickly.
operating safety.
If the brakes have been used only moderately,
you should occasionally test their effectiveness.
To do this, brake more firmly from a higher
speed. This improves the grip of the brakes.
Z
Driving tips172High-performance brake systemR avoid sudden steering movements(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)R brake carefullyThe high-performance brake system is designedDriving on flooded roadsfor high loads. This may lead to noise whenbraking. This is dependent on:! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in frontR speedor in the opposite direction create waves. Thismay cause the maximum permissible waterR braking forcedepth to be exceeded.R environmental conditions, such as tempera-Driving and parkingThese notes must be observed under all cir-ture and humiditycumstances. You could otherwise damageThe wear of individual brake system compo-the engine, the electronics or the transmis-nents such as the brake pads/linings or depends on individual driving style andoperating you must drive on stretches of road on whichwater has collected, please bear in mind that:For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-age (service life) that will be valid under all cir-R in the case of standing water, the water levelcumstances. An aggressive driving style willmust be no higher than the lower edge of thelead to high wear. You can obtain further infor-vehicle bodymation about this from your Mercedes-BenzR you should drive no faster than walking paceService pads/linings and discs that are either newOff-road fordingor have been replaced only achieve optimumbraking effect after several hundred kilometres! Under no circumstances should you accel-of driving. Compensate for the reduced brakingerate before entering the water. The boweffect by applying greater force to the brakewave could cause water to enter and damagepedal. Always be aware of this and adapt yourthe engine and neighbouring and braking accordingly during the run-ning-in period.! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors whilefording. Otherwise, water could get into theExcessive heavy braking results in correspond-vehicle interior and damage the vehicle'singly high brake
Driving tips
172
High-performance brake system
R avoid sudden steering movements
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
R brake carefully
The high-performance brake system is designed
Driving on flooded roads
for high loads. This may lead to noise when
braking. This is dependent on:
! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front
R speed
or in the opposite direction create waves. This
may cause the maximum permissible water
R braking force
depth to be exceeded.
R environmental conditions, such as tempera-
Driving and parking
These notes must be observed under all cir-
ture and humidity
cumstances. You could otherwise damage
The wear of individual brake system compo-
the engine, the electronics or the transmis-
nents such as the brake pads/linings or brake
sion.
discs depends on individual driving style and
operating conditions.
If you must drive on stretches of road on which
water has collected, please bear in mind that:
For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-
age (service life) that will be valid under all cir-
R in the case of standing water, the water level
cumstances. An aggressive driving style will
must be no higher than the lower edge of the
lead to high wear. You can obtain further infor-
vehicle body
mation about this from your Mercedes-Benz
R you should drive no faster than walking pace
Service Centre.
Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new
Off-road fording
or have been replaced only achieve optimum
braking effect after several hundred kilometres
! Under no circumstances should you accel-
of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking
erate before entering the water. The bow
effect by applying greater force to the brake
wave could cause water to enter and damage
pedal. Always be aware of this and adapt your
the engine and neighbouring assemblies.
driving and braking accordingly during the run-
ning-in period.
! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors while
fording. Otherwise, water could get into the
Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-
vehicle interior and damage the vehicle's
ingly high brake wear. Observe the # brake
electronics and interior equipment.
wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and
note any brake status messages in the multi-
R Establish how deep the water is and the char-
function display. If you regularly drive at high
acteristics of the body of water before ford-
speeds, it is particularly important to have the
ing.
brake system checked and maintained regu-
R Select the highest possible vehicle level.
larly.
R Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-
ing wheel gearshift paddle.
R Avoid high engine speeds.
Driving on wet roads
R Enter and exit the water at a flat place and at
a steady walking pace.
Aquaplaning
R Drive slowly and at a constant speed through
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
the water.
the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplan-
R Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you
ing occurring, even if:
drive.
R you are driving at low speeds
R Do not stop and do not switch off the engine.
R the tyres have adequate tread depth
Water offers a high degree of resistance, the
ground is slippery and, in some cases, unsta-
For this reason, drive in the following manner in
ble. Therefore, it is difficult and dangerous to
the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which
pull away in the water.
aquaplaning can occur:
R Clean any mud from the tyre tread after ford-
R lower your speed
ing.
R avoid tyre ruts
R Apply the brakes to dry them after fording.
Driving tips173Always observe the fording depth valuesis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.( Y page 396).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short temperatures just above the freezingWinter drivingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The road may still be icy, especially inG WARNINGwooded areas or on bridges. You should payspecial attention to road conditions when tem-If you shift down on a slippery road surface inperatures are around freezing attempt to increase the engine's brakingDriving and parkingFurther information on driving with snow chainseffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.( Y page 370).This increases the risk of skidding and havingFurther information on driving with summeran ( Y page 369).Do not shift down for additional engine brak-Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"ing on a slippery road ( Y page 375).G DANGEROff-road drivingIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasesImportant safety notessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter theG WARNINGvehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk ofIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orfatal on a steep incline, the vehicle could slipIf you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingsideways, tip and overturn. There is a risk ofrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaan the vehicle are clear of snow. ToWhen driving on an incline, drive into the lineensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open aof fall (upwards or downwards in a straightwindow on the side of the vehicle that is notline) and do not into the wind.G WARNING! Take care not to damage the sealing stripFlammable material such as leaves, grass orand the moulding on the side of the rear win-twigs may ignite if they come into contact withdow when scraping ice off the rear parts of the exhaust syst
Driving tips
173
Always observe the fording depth values
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
( Y page 396).
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
Winter driving
point do not guarantee that the road surface is
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
G WARNING
wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay
special attention to road conditions when tem-
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
peratures are around freezing point.
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
Driving and parking
Further information on driving with snow chains
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
( Y page 370).
This increases the risk of skidding and having
Further information on driving with summer
an accident.
tyres ( Y page 369).
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
ing on a slippery road surface.
section ( Y page 375).
G DANGER
Off-road driving
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
Important safety notes
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
G WARNING
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
fatal injury.
turn on a steep incline, the vehicle could slip
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
sideways, tip and overturn. There is a risk of
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
an accident.
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
When driving on an incline, drive into the line
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
of fall (upwards or downwards in a straight
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
line) and do not turn.
facing into the wind.
G WARNING
! Take care not to damage the sealing strip
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
and the moulding on the side of the rear win-
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
dow when scraping ice off the rear window.
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
of fire.
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
You should drive particularly carefully on slip-
pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration,
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
steering and braking manoeuvres. Do not use
particular, remove parts of plants or other
cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
flammable materials which have become
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
stopped when moving at low speed:
qualified specialist workshop.
X Shift the transmission to position i.
G WARNING
X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using
corrective steering.
If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle centre of
When driving in snow with or without snow
gravity is raised. This could cause the vehicle
chains, select driving program Slippery
to tip over more easily on uphill or downhill
( Y page 151).
gradients. There is a risk of an accident.
The outside temperature indicator is not
Select the lowest possible vehicle level.
designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
Z
Driving tips174General notes! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:R the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highH Environmental notekerb or an unpaved roadProtection of the environment is of primaryR you drive too quickly over an obstacle, . Treat nature with respect.a kerb, slowing thresholds or a pothole inthe roadObserve all prohibiting signs.R a heavy object strikes the underbody orRead this section before driving your vehicle off-parts of the chassisroad. Practise by driving over more gentle off-Driving and parkingIn situations like this, the body, underbody,road terrain parts, wheels or tyres could be dam-The following driving systems are speciallyaged without the damage being visible. Com-adapted to off-road driving:ponents damaged in this way can unexpect-edly fail or, in the case of an accident, no lon-R Off-Road drive program (vehicles without Off-ger withstand the strain they are designed toRoad Engineering package) ( Y page 226)withstand.R Off-Road and Off-Road Plus drive programsIf the underbody panelling is damaged, com-(vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package)bustible materials such as leaves, grass or( Y page 227)twigs can gather between the underbody andR LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles with thethe underbody panelling. If these materialsOff-Road Engineering package)come into contact with hot parts of the( Y page 228)exhaust system, they can catch fire.R differential lock (vehicles with the Off-RoadIn such situations, have the vehicle checkedEngineering package) ( Y page 227)and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-R off-road ABS ( Y page 71)cialist workshop. If, on continuing your jour-ney, you notice that driving safety is impaired,R off-road 4ETS ( Y page 74)stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-R off-road ESP ® ( Y page 76)tion to road and traffic conditions. In suchR AIRMATIC package (vehicle level)cases, consult a qualified specialist work-( Y page 194)shop.R DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)When driv
Driving tips
174
General notes
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
R the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
H Environmental note
kerb or an unpaved road
Protection of the environment is of primary
R you drive too quickly over an obstacle, e.g.
importance. Treat nature with respect.
a kerb, slowing thresholds or a pothole in
the road
Observe all prohibiting signs.
R a heavy object strikes the underbody or
Read this section before driving your vehicle off-
parts of the chassis
road. Practise by driving over more gentle off-
Driving and parking
In situations like this, the body, underbody,
road terrain first.
chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be dam-
The following driving systems are specially
aged without the damage being visible. Com-
adapted to off-road driving:
ponents damaged in this way can unexpect-
edly fail or, in the case of an accident, no lon-
R Off-Road drive program (vehicles without Off-
ger withstand the strain they are designed to
Road Engineering package) ( Y page 226)
withstand.
R Off-Road and Off-Road Plus drive programs
If the underbody panelling is damaged, com-
(vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package)
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
( Y page 227)
twigs can gather between the underbody and
R LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles with the
the underbody panelling. If these materials
Off-Road Engineering package)
come into contact with hot parts of the
( Y page 228)
exhaust system, they can catch fire.
R differential lock (vehicles with the Off-Road
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
Engineering package) ( Y page 227)
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
R off-road ABS ( Y page 71)
cialist workshop. If, on continuing your jour-
ney, you notice that driving safety is impaired,
R off-road 4ETS ( Y page 74)
stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
R off-road ESP ® ( Y page 76)
tion to road and traffic conditions. In such
R AIRMATIC package (vehicle level)
cases, consult a qualified specialist work-
( Y page 194)
shop.
R DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
When driving off-road, substances such as sand,
( Y page 225)
mud and water or water mixed with oil may get
Observe the following notes:
into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in
R Stop the vehicle before driving off-road. If
braking performance or total brake failure as a
necessary, select the off-road program
result of increased wear. The braking charac-
( Y page 227) or shift to the LOW RANGE off-
teristics will vary depending on the substances
road gear ( Y page 228).
that get into the brakes. Clean the brakes after
driving off-road. If you notice grinding noises or
R Select a vehicle level suitable for the off-road
a reduction in braking performance, have the
terrain. To avoid damaging the vehicle, make
brake system checked at a qualified specialist
sure there is always sufficient ground clear-
workshop immediately. Adapt your driving style
ance.
to the altered braking characteristics.
R Make sure that items of luggage and loads are
Driving off-road increases the possibility of dam-
stowed safely and are well secured
age to the vehicle, which may cause assemblies
( Y page 318).
or systems to fail. Adapt your driving style to the
R Always keep the engine running and in gear
conditions of the terrain. Drive carefully. Have
when driving on a downhill gradient. Activate
vehicle damage rectified immediately at a quali-
DSR ( Y page 225).
fied specialist workshop.
R Drive slowly and smoothly, at walking pace if
Do not shift into transmission position N when
necessary.
driving off-road. You could lose control of the
R Ensure that the wheels are in contact with the
vehicle if you attempt to brake the vehicle using
ground at all times.
the service brake. If the gradient is too steep for
R Drive with extreme care on unknown off-road
your vehicle, back up in reverse gear.
routes where visibility is poor. For safety rea-
Driving tips175Checklist after off-road drivingsons, get out of the vehicle first and surveythe off-road route.! If you detect damage to the vehicle afterR Look out for obstacles such as rocks, holes,driving off-road, have the vehicle checkedtree stumps and at a qualified specialist work-R Take care when turning on an uphill or slope and when driving across a over rough terrain places greaterOtherwise, the vehicle could tip on your vehicle than driving on normalR Always keep the doors, the tailgate, the sideroads. After driving off-road, check the and the sliding sunroof closed whileDriving and parkingThis allows you to detect damage promptly andthe vehicle is in the risk of an accident to yourself andR Do not stray from marked routes or road users.R Observe the notes on off-road fordingX If the Off-road or Off-road Plus drive pro-( Y page 172).gram is selected: select the Individual,i Information about retrofitting special all-ter-Sport, Comfort or Slippery drive programrain tyres is available from any qualified spe-( Y page 151).cialist workshop.X Deactivate the LOW RANGE offroad gear( Y page 228).i Do not use the HOLD function when drivingX Deactivate DSR ( Y page 225).off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradientsor on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLDX Lower the vehicle level again to a level suita-function cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-ble to the road conditions, e.g. to the .X Clean the headlamps and rear lights andChecklist before off-road drivingcheck for damage.X Clean the front and rear licence plates.X Engine oil level: check the engine oil and topX Clean the wheels and tyres with a water jetup if remove any foreign driving on steep gradients, the oil levelX Clean the wheels, wheel arches and the vehi-must be sufficiently high to ensure a correctcle underside with a water jet; check for anyoil suppl
Driving tips
175
Checklist after off-road driving
sons, get out of the vehicle first and survey
the off-road route.
! If you detect damage to the vehicle after
R Look out for obstacles such as rocks, holes,
driving off-road, have the vehicle checked
tree stumps and furrows.
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
R Take care when turning on an uphill or down-
shop.
hill slope and when driving across a slope.
Driving over rough terrain places greater
Otherwise, the vehicle could tip over.
demands on your vehicle than driving on normal
R Always keep the doors, the tailgate, the side
roads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle.
windows and the sliding sunroof closed while
Driving and parking
This allows you to detect damage promptly and
the vehicle is in motion.
reduce the risk of an accident to yourself and
R Do not stray from marked routes or paths.
other road users.
R Observe the notes on off-road fording
X If the Off-road or Off-road Plus drive pro-
( Y page 172).
gram is selected: select the Individual,
i Information about retrofitting special all-ter-
Sport, Comfort or Slippery drive program
rain tyres is available from any qualified spe-
( Y page 151).
cialist workshop.
X Deactivate the LOW RANGE offroad gear
( Y page 228).
i Do not use the HOLD function when driving
X Deactivate DSR ( Y page 225).
off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients
or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD
X Lower the vehicle level again to a level suita-
function cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-
ble to the road conditions, e.g. to the normal
faces.
level.
X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and
Checklist before off-road driving
check for damage.
X Clean the front and rear licence plates.
X Engine oil level: check the engine oil and top
X Clean the wheels and tyres with a water jet
up if necessary.
and remove any foreign objects.
When driving on steep gradients, the oil level
X Clean the wheels, wheel arches and the vehi-
must be sufficiently high to ensure a correct
cle underside with a water jet; check for any
oil supply in the vehicle.
foreign objects and damage.
X AdBlue ® tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check
X Check whether twigs or other parts of plants
the level and top up if necessary
have become trapped. These increase the risk
( Y page 163).
of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake
X Tyre-change tool kit: check that the jack is
hoses or the rubber bellows of the axle joints
working and make sure that the wheel
and propeller shafts.
wrench, a robust tow cable and a folding
X After the trip, examine without fail the entire
spade are in the vehicle.
undercarriage, wheels, tyres, brakes, body-
X Wheels and tyres: check the tread depth
work structure, steering, chassis and exhaust
and pressure of the tyres.
system for damage.
X Check for damage and remove any foreign
X After driving for extended periods across
objects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/
sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty
tyres.
conditions, have the brake discs, wheels,
X Replace any missing valve caps.
brake pads/linings and axle joints checked
and cleaned.
X Replace dented or damaged wheels.
X If you detect strong vibrations after driving
X Wheels: dented or bent wheels can lead to a
off-road, check for foreign objects in the
loss of tyre pressure and damage to the tyre
wheels and drive train and remove them if
bead. Before driving off-road, check the
necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the
wheels and replace them if necessary.
balance and cause vibrations.
Z
Driving tips176Driving on sandDriving over obstaclesObserve the following rules when driving on! Obstacles could damage the floor of thesand:vehicle or components of the chassis. Askpassengers for guidance when driving overR Select the Offroad drive program (vehicleslarge obstacles. Any damage to the vehiclewith Off-Road Engineering package)always increases the risk of an accident.( Y page 227).Observe the following rules when driving overR Select the Offroad drive program (vehiclestree stumps, large stones and other obstacles:without Off-Road Engineering package)Driving and parking( Y page 226).R Select the Offroad drive program (vehiclesR Select a higher vehicle Off-Road Engineering package)( Y page 227).R Avoid high engine speeds.R Select the Offroad drive program (vehiclesR Use the left-hand steering wheel gearshiftwithout Off-Road Engineering package)paddle to shift to a lower gear appropriate to( Y page 226).the terrain.R Select LOW RANGE offroad gear (vehiclesR Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-with Off-Road Engineering package)ance. Otherwise, the vehicle could dig itself( Y page 228)into the sand.R Raise the vehicle level.R Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi-ble. Make sure that:R Avoid high engine speeds.- the tyre ruts are not too deepR Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-ing wheel gearshift paddle.- the sand is firm enoughR Drive very slowly.- your vehicle has sufficient ground clear-anceR Drive straight over the centre of ruts and unpaved roadsTravelling uphill! Check that the ruts are not too deep andthat your vehicle has sufficient angleOtherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orG WARNINGbottom out and get the following rules when driving alongIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orruts in off-road terrain or on roads with looseturn on a steep incline, the vehicle could slipgravel:sideways, tip and overturn. There is a risk ofR Select the Offr
Driving tips
176
Driving on sand
Driving over obstacles
Observe the following rules when driving on
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the
sand:
vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask
passengers for guidance when driving over
R Select the Offroad drive program (vehicles
large obstacles. Any damage to the vehicle
with Off-Road Engineering package)
always increases the risk of an accident.
( Y page 227).
Observe the following rules when driving over
R Select the Offroad drive program (vehicles
tree stumps, large stones and other obstacles:
without Off-Road Engineering package)
Driving and parking
( Y page 226).
R Select the Offroad drive program (vehicles
R Select a higher vehicle level.
with Off-Road Engineering package)
( Y page 227).
R Avoid high engine speeds.
R Select the Offroad drive program (vehicles
R Use the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
without Off-Road Engineering package)
paddle to shift to a lower gear appropriate to
( Y page 226).
the terrain.
R Select LOW RANGE offroad gear (vehicles
R Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-
with Off-Road Engineering package)
ance. Otherwise, the vehicle could dig itself
( Y page 228)
into the sand.
R Raise the vehicle level.
R Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi-
ble. Make sure that:
R Avoid high engine speeds.
- the tyre ruts are not too deep
R Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-
ing wheel gearshift paddle.
- the sand is firm enough
R Drive very slowly.
- your vehicle has sufficient ground clear-
ance
R Drive straight over the centre of obstacles.
Tyre ruts and unpaved roads
Travelling uphill
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.
Approach/departure angle
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
G WARNING
bottom out and get stuck.
Observe the following rules when driving along
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loose
turn on a steep incline, the vehicle could slip
gravel:
sideways, tip and overturn. There is a risk of
R Select the Offroad drive program (vehicles
an accident.
with Off-Road Engineering package)
When driving on an incline, drive into the line
( Y page 227).
of fall (upwards or downwards in a straight
R Select the Offroad drive program (vehicles
line) and do not turn.
without Off-Road Engineering package)
( Y page 226).
R Observe the warnings for off-road driving
R Select a higher vehicle level.
( Y page 173).
R Avoid high engine speeds.
R Follow the line of fall when driving on slopes
R Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-
and steep inclines.
ing wheel gearshift paddle.
R Select the Offroad drive program (vehicles
R Drive slowly.
with Off-Road Engineering package)
R Where ruts are too deep, drive with the
( Y page 227).
wheels on one side on the middle section of
R Select the Offroad drive program (vehicles
turf if possible.
without Off-Road Engineering package)
( Y page 226).
Driving systems177R Before driving on extreme uphill and downhillR Before tackling steep downhill gradients, usegradients, select the LOW RANGE offroadthe left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddlegear (vehicles with Off-Road Engineeringto shift to a lower ) ( Y page 228).R Activate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brakeR Drive . When doing so, make sure that thevehicle is facing in the direction of the line ofR Accelerate gently and make sure that are gripping.R Check that the brakes are working normallyR Avoid high engine speeds, except when driv-after a long downhill on sandy and muddy routes with high driv-Driving and parkinging resistance.i Off-road ABS is activated when the off-roadR Use the left-hand steering wheel gearshiftprogram is to shift to a lower gear appropriate toAt speeds below 30 km/h the front wheelsthe cyclically during braking. The digging-inR Use the left-hand gearshift paddle to shift to aeffect achieved in the process reduces thelower gear on long and steep downhill gradi-stopping distance when driving off-road. of the vehicle is considerablyHill start assist will aid you when pulling away onreduced if the wheels lock.a hill. Further information on hill start assist( Y page 147).Do not shift into transmission position N whenDriving systemsdriving off-road. You could lose control of theIntelligent Drivevehicle if you attempt to brake the vehicle usingthe service brake. If the gradient is too steep forMercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-your vehicle, back up in reverse driver assistance and safety systemsAlways observe the approach/departure anglewhich enhance comfort and support the driver invalues ( Y page 396).critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi-nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-Maximum gradient-climbing abilitystone on the path towards autonomous -Benz Intelligent Drive embrac
Driving systems
177
R Before driving on extreme uphill and downhill
R Before tackling steep downhill gradients, use
gradients, select the LOW RANGE offroad
the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle
gear (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering
to shift to a lower gear.
package) ( Y page 228).
R Activate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
R Drive slowly.
gently. When doing so, make sure that the
vehicle is facing in the direction of the line of
R Accelerate gently and make sure that the
fall.
wheels are gripping.
R Check that the brakes are working normally
R Avoid high engine speeds, except when driv-
after a long downhill stretch.
ing on sandy and muddy routes with high driv-
Driving and parking
ing resistance.
i Off-road ABS is activated when the off-road
R Use the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
program is selected.
paddle to shift to a lower gear appropriate to
At speeds below 30 km/h the front wheels
the gradient.
lock cyclically during braking. The digging-in
R Use the left-hand gearshift paddle to shift to a
effect achieved in the process reduces the
lower gear on long and steep downhill gradi-
stopping distance when driving off-road. The
ents.
steerability of the vehicle is considerably
Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on
reduced if the wheels lock.
a hill. Further information on hill start assist
( Y page 147).
Do not shift into transmission position N when
Driving systems
driving off-road. You could lose control of the
Intelligent Drive
vehicle if you attempt to brake the vehicle using
the service brake. If the gradient is too steep for
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-
your vehicle, back up in reverse gear.
vative driver assistance and safety systems
Always observe the approach/departure angle
which enhance comfort and support the driver in
values ( Y page 396).
critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi-
nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-
Maximum gradient-climbing ability
stone on the path towards autonomous driving.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
Always observe the maximum gradient climbing
elements of active and passive safety in one well
ability values ( Y page 397).
thought-out system – for the safety of the vehi-
cle occupants and that of other road users.
Hilltops
Further information on driving safety systems
( Y page 70).
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly
reduce pressure on the accelerator immediately
before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of
the vehicle's own impetus to travel over the
Cruise control
brow.
General notes
This style of driving prevents:
R the vehicle from lifting off the ground on the
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
brow of a hill
for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. You must select a
R the vehicle from travelling too quickly down
lower gear in good time on long and steep down-
the other side
hill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or
towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use of
Driving downhill
the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the
load on the brake system and prevents the
R Drive slowly.
brakes from overheating and wearing too
R Do not drive at an angle down steep inclines.
quickly.
Steer into the line of fall and drive with the
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
front wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, the
ditions are appropriate for maintaining a steady
vehicle could slip sideways, tip and overturn.
Z
Driving systems178speed for a prolonged period. You can store anyLIM indicator lamp ; on the cruise control leverroad speed above 30 km/ which function you have selected:R LIM indicator lamp ; off: cruise control isImportant safety notesselectedR LIM indicator lamp ; on: variable speedIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-limiter is can neither reduce the risk of an accidentWhen you activate cruise control, the storednor override the laws of physics. Cruise controlspeed is shown in the multifunction display forcannot take into account road, weather or trafficDriving and parkingfive seconds. In addition, the é symbolconditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You areappears in the multifunction for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in good timeSpeedometer with segments: when cruiseand for staying in is activated, the segments from theDo not use cruise control:stored speed to the maximum permitted speedlight up.R in road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. inSelecting cruise controlheavy traffic or on winding roadsR on smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accel-X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is can cause the drive wheels to loseIf it is off, cruise control is already and the vehicle could then skidIf it is not, press the cruise control lever in theR when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,direction of arrow A .heavy rain or snowLIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise controlIf there is a change of drivers, advise the newlever goes out. Cruise control is of the speed conditionsCruise control leverTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:R the electric parking brake must be released.R you are driving faster than 30 km/h.R ESP ® must be switched on, but not interven-ing.R the transmission must be in position
Driving systems
178
speed for a prolonged period. You can store any
LIM indicator lamp ; on the cruise control lever
road speed above 30 km/h.
indicates which function you have selected:
R LIM indicator lamp ; off: cruise control is
Important safety notes
selected
R LIM indicator lamp ; on: variable speed
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-
limiter is selected.
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
When you activate cruise control, the stored
nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control
speed is shown in the multifunction display for
cannot take into account road, weather or traffic
Driving and parking
five seconds. In addition, the é symbol
conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are
appears in the multifunction display.
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
Speedometer with segments: when cruise
and for staying in lane.
control is activated, the segments from the
Do not use cruise control:
stored speed to the maximum permitted speed
light up.
R in road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
Selecting cruise control
heavy traffic or on winding roads
R on smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accel-
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off.
erating can cause the drive wheels to lose
If it is off, cruise control is already selected.
traction and the vehicle could then skid
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the
R when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
direction of arrow A .
heavy rain or snow
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
lever goes out. Cruise control is selected.
driver of the speed stored.
Activation conditions
Cruise control lever
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
R the electric parking brake must be released.
R you are driving faster than 30 km/h.
R ESP ® must be switched on, but not interven-
ing.
R the transmission must be in position D.
R DSR must be deactivated.
R the Offroad Plus drive program must be deac-
tivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineer-
ing package).
: To activate or increase speed
R the cruise control function must be selected
( Y page 178).
; LIM indicator lamp
= To activate at the current speed/last stored
Storing, maintaining and calling up a
speed
speed
? To activate or reduce speed
A To switch between cruise control and the
Storing and maintaining the speed
variable speed limiter
B To deactivate cruise control
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or
You can operate cruise control and the variable
down ?.
speed limiter with the cruise control lever.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-
matically maintains the stored speed.
Driving systems179i Cruise control may be unable to maintaini Cruise control is not deactivated if youthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thedepress the accelerator pedal. For example, ifstored speed is resumed when the gradientyou accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-evens out. Cruise control maintains thetrol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the speedstored speed on downhill gradients by auto-stored after you have finished braking the cruise controlStoring or calling up the speedThere are several ways to deactivate cruise con-G WARNINGDriving and parkingtrol:If you call up a stored speed and this is dif-X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwardsferent from the current speed, the vehicle=.accelerates or brakes. If you do not knoworwhat the stored speed is, the vehicle mayX or brake unexpectedly. There is aorrisk of an accident.X Briefly press the cruise control lever in theTake the traffic conditions into accountdirection of arrow ;.before calling up the stored speed. If you doThe variable speed limiter is selected. LIMnot know what the stored speed is, store theindicator lamp : in the cruise control leverlights speed control is automatically deactivated if:X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsR you apply the electric parking brakeyou =.R you are driving at less than 30 km/hX Remove your foot from the accelerator control is on and, when activated forR ESP ® engages or you deactivate ESP ®the first time, accepts the current speed or itR you activate DSRadjusts the vehicle's speed to the speedR you activate the Offroad Plus program ( with the Off-Road Engineering package)R you shift the transmission to position N whileSetting a speeddrivingIf cruise control is deactivated, you will hear aBear in mind that it may take a brief momentwarning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐until the vehicle has accelerated or braked totrol off message
Driving systems
179
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the speed
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-
stored after you have finished overtaking.
matically braking the vehicle.
Deactivating cruise control
Storing or calling up the speed
There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-
G WARNING
Driving and parking
trol:
If you call up a stored speed and this is dif-
X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards
ferent from the current speed, the vehicle
=.
accelerates or brakes. If you do not know
or
what the stored speed is, the vehicle may
X Brake.
accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a
or
risk of an accident.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
Take the traffic conditions into account
direction of arrow ;.
before calling up the stored speed. If you do
The variable speed limiter is selected. LIM
not know what the stored speed is, store the
indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever
lights up.
desired speed again.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
R you apply the electric parking brake
you =.
R you are driving at less than 30 km/h
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is on and, when activated for
R ESP ® engages or you deactivate ESP ®
the first time, accepts the current speed or it
R you activate DSR
adjusts the vehicle's speed to the speed
R you activate the Offroad Plus program (vehi-
stored.
cles with the Off-Road Engineering package)
R you shift the transmission to position N while
Setting a speed
driving
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
Bear in mind that it may take a brief moment
warning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
trol off message in the multifunction display
the set speed.
for approximately five seconds.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed.
i The last speed stored is cleared when you
switch off the engine.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the
desired speed is reached.
X Release the cruise control lever.
Speed limiter
The new speed is stored.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-
General notes
ments: briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ? to the pressure point.
The speed limiter brakes automatically so that
The last stored speed increases or decreases
you do not exceed the set speed. You must
in 1 km/h increments.
select a lower gear in good time on long and
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h incre-
steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehi-
ments: briefly press the cruise control lever
cle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so, you
up : or down ? beyond the pressure point.
will make use of the braking effect of the engine.
The last stored speed increases or decreases
This relieves the load on the brake system and
in 10 km/h increments.
prevents the brakes from overheating and wear-
ing too quickly.
Z
Driving systems180You can set a variable or permanent limit speed:LIM indicator lamp ; on the cruise control leverindicates which function you have selected:R Variable for a maximum permissible speed,R LIM indicator lamp ; off: cruise control ore.g. in built-up areasDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is selected.R Permanent for long-term maximum permis-R LIM indicator lamp ; on: variable speedsible speeds, e.g. when driving with wintertyres fitted ( Y page 181)limiter is can use the cruise control lever to limit thei The speed indicated in the speedometerspeed to any speed above 30 km/h while themay differ slightly from the maximum permis-Driving and parkingengine is speed speed limiterImportant safety notesIf there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the limit speed you fail to adapt your driving style, the speedlimiter can neither reduce the risk of an accidentX Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is override the laws of physics. The speed lim-If it is on, the variable speed limiter is alreadyiter cannot take into account road, weather conditions. The speed limiter is only anIf it is not, press the cruise control lever in theaid. You are responsible for the distance to thedirection of arrow in front, for vehicle speed, for braking inLIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise controlgood time and for staying in is on. The variable speed limiter is selec-If a new driver takes over, advise the new the speed the current speedVariable speed limiterYou can use the cruise control lever to limit thespeed to any speed above 30 km/h while theCruise control leverengine is running.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : ordown ?.The current speed is stored and shown in themultifunction with segments: the seg-ments light up from the start of the scale up tothe stored speed segments in the multifunction displaylight up fro
Driving systems
180
You can set a variable or permanent limit speed:
LIM indicator lamp ; on the cruise control lever
indicates which function you have selected:
R Variable for a maximum permissible speed,
R LIM indicator lamp ; off: cruise control or
e.g. in built-up areas
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is selected.
R Permanent for long-term maximum permis-
R LIM indicator lamp ; on: variable speed
sible speeds, e.g. when driving with winter
tyres fitted ( Y page 181)
limiter is selected.
You can use the cruise control lever to limit the
i The speed indicated in the speedometer
speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the
may differ slightly from the maximum permis-
Driving and parking
engine is running.
sible speed stored.
Selecting speed limiter
Important safety notes
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the limit speed stored.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, the speed
limiter can neither reduce the risk of an accident
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on.
nor override the laws of physics. The speed lim-
If it is on, the variable speed limiter is already
iter cannot take into account road, weather or
selected.
traffic conditions. The speed limiter is only an
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
direction of arrow A.
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
good time and for staying in lane.
lever is on. The variable speed limiter is selec-
If a new driver takes over, advise the new driver
ted.
of the speed stored.
Storing the current speed
Variable speed limiter
You can use the cruise control lever to limit the
speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the
Cruise control lever
engine is running.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or
down ?.
The current speed is stored and shown in the
multifunction display.
Speedometer with segments: the seg-
ments light up from the start of the scale up to
the stored speed limit.
The segments in the multifunction display
light up from the start of the scale up to the
stored speed.
Storing the current speed or calling up the
: To activate or increase speed
last stored speed
; LIM indicator lamp
G WARNING
= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed
If you call up the stored speed and it is lower
? To activate or reduce speed
than the current speed, the vehicle deceler-
A To switch between cruise control or Dis-
ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the
tance Pilot DISTRONIC and the variable
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There
speed limiter
is a risk of an accident.
B To switch off the variable speed limiter
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
With the cruise control lever, you can operate
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and
do not know the stored speed, store the
the variable speed limiter.
desired speed again.
Driving systems181X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsYou cannot switch the variable speed limiter offyou =.by braking.i The last speed stored is cleared when youSetting a speedswitch off the engine.X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h incre-ments: briefly press the cruise control leverPermanent limiterup : beyond the pressure point for a higherYou can use the on-board computer to perma-speed, or down ? for a lower limit the speed to a value betweenor160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) andDriving and parkingthe maximum design speed ( Y page 253).X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyondthe pressure point until the desired speed isShortly before the stored speed is reached, itset. Press the cruise control lever up : for aappears in the multifunction speed or down ? for a lower permanent speed limiter remains activeeven if the variable speed limiter is deactivated.X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-ments: briefly press the cruise control leverYou cannot exceed the stored limit speed, evenup : to the pressure point for a higher speedif you depress the accelerator pedal beyond theor down ? for a lower point (kickdown).orX Keep the cruise control lever pressed to theDistance Pilot DISTRONICpressure point until the desired speed is the cruise control lever up : for aGeneral noteshigher speed or down ? for a lower Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speedSwitching the speed limiter to passiveand automatically helps you maintain the dis-If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond thetance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehiclespressure point (kickdown), the speed limiter isare detected with the aid of the radar sensorswitched to passive mode. The Limiter pas‐system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes auto-sive message appears in the multifunction dis-matically so that the set speed is not must select a lower gear in good time onYou can then exceed the stor
Driving systems
181
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
You cannot switch the variable speed limiter off
you =.
by braking.
i The last speed stored is cleared when you
Setting a speed
switch off the engine.
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h incre-
ments: briefly press the cruise control lever
Permanent limiter
up : beyond the pressure point for a higher
You can use the on-board computer to perma-
speed, or down ? for a lower speed.
nently limit the speed to a value between
or
160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and
Driving and parking
the maximum design speed ( Y page 253).
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond
the pressure point until the desired speed is
Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it
set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a
appears in the multifunction display.
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed.
The permanent speed limiter remains active
even if the variable speed limiter is deactivated.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-
ments: briefly press the cruise control lever
You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even
up : to the pressure point for a higher speed
if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
or down ? for a lower speed.
pressure point (kickdown).
or
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
pressure point until the desired speed is set.
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
General notes
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed
Switching the speed limiter to passive
and automatically helps you maintain the dis-
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles
pressure point (kickdown), the speed limiter is
are detected with the aid of the radar sensor
switched to passive mode. The Limiter pas‐
system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes auto-
sive message appears in the multifunction dis-
matically so that the set speed is not exceeded.
play.
You must select a lower gear in good time on
You can then exceed the stored speed. The
long and steep downhill gradients, especially if
speed limiter is activated again if you:
the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing
so, you will make use of the braking effect of the
R drive slower than the stored speed without
engine. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
kickdown
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
R set a new speed or
and wearing too quickly.
R call up the last speed stored again
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is
The Limiter passive message in the multi-
a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually
function display disappears.
and acoustically. Without your intervention, Dis-
tance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a colli-
Switching off the variable speed limiter
sion. An intermittent warning tone will then
There are several ways to deactivate the varia-
sound and the distance warning lamp will light
ble speed limiter:
up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately
to increase the distance to the vehicle in front,
X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards
or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
B.
so.
or
For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you
X Briefly move the cruise control lever in the
when driving, the radar sensor system must be
direction of arrow A.
operational.
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range
lever goes out. The variable speed limiter is
between 0 km/h and 200 km/h.
switched off.
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC while driv-
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
ing on roads with steep gradients.
selected.
Z
Driving systems182Important safety notesTo avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inG WARNINGthe following or similar situations:Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not recogniseR when towing awayR in a car washR people or animalsThe Distance Pilot DISTRONICR stationary objects on the road, e.g. stoppedor parked vehiclesR can neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics if you fail to adaptDriving and parkingR oncoming vehicles or crossing trafficyour driving a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC mayR cannot take into account road, weather orneither give warnings nor intervene in suchtraffic . There is a risk of an accident.R is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time and for staying inuation and be ready to .G WARNINGDo not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:R in road and traffic conditions that do not allowDistance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot alwaysyou to maintain a constant speed, e.g. inclearly identify other road users and complexheavy traffic or on winding situations.R on icy or slippery roads. Braking or acceler-In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may:ating can cause the drive wheels to lose trac-tion and the vehicle could then skid.R give an unnecessary warning and thenR in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orbrake the vehiclesnow.R neither give a warning nor interveneDistance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect nar-R accelerate or brake unexpectedlyrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving in a staggered is a risk of an particular, the detection of obstacles can beContinue to drive carefully and be ready toimpaired in the following situations:brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONICR dirt on the sensors or obscured sensorswarns you.R snow or heavy rainG WARNINGR interferen
Driving systems
182
Important safety notes
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
G WARNING
the following or similar situations:
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not recognise
R when towing away
R in a car wash
R people or animals
The Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
R stationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped
or parked vehicles
R can neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics if you fail to adapt
Driving and parking
R oncoming vehicles or crossing traffic
your driving style.
As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may
R cannot take into account road, weather or
neither give warnings nor intervene in such
traffic conditions.
situations. There is a risk of an accident.
R is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time and for staying in
uation and be ready to brake.
lane.
G WARNING
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
R in road and traffic conditions that do not allow
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always
you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
clearly identify other road users and complex
heavy traffic or on winding roads.
traffic situations.
R on icy or slippery roads. Braking or acceler-
In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may:
ating can cause the drive wheels to lose trac-
tion and the vehicle could then skid.
R give an unnecessary warning and then
R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
brake the vehicle
snow.
R neither give a warning nor intervene
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect nar-
R accelerate or brake unexpectedly
row vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
vehicles driving in a staggered formation.
There is a risk of an accident.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
impaired in the following situations:
brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
R dirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
warns you.
R snow or heavy rain
G WARNING
R interference by other radar sources
R strong radar reflections, e.g. in multi-storey
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle
car parks
with up to 50% of the maximum possible
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a
deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi-
vehicle in front, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may
cient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you
unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored.
with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a
This speed can:
risk of an accident.
R be too high for a filter lane or a slip road
Apply the brakes yourself in these situations
R be so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-
and try to take evasive action.
cles driving on the left
R be so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
cles driving on the right
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
If a new driver takes over, advise the new driver
brakes automatically in certain situations.
of the speed stored.
Driving systems183Cruise control leverActivating Distance Pilot DISTRONICActivation conditionsTo activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:R the engine must be running. It may take up totwo minutes of driving before Distance PilotDISTRONIC is ready for and parkingR the electric parking brake must be released.R ESP ® must be switched on, but not interven-ing.R the transmission must be in position D.R the driver's door must be closed when you: To activate or increase speedshift from P to D or your seat belt must be; To set the specified minimum distancefastened.= LIM indicator lampR the front-passenger door and the rear doors? To activate at the current speed/last storedmust be the Offroad Plus drive program must be deac-A To activate or reduce speedtivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineer-B To switch between Distance Piloting package).DISTRONIC and the variable limiterR DSR must be deactivated.C To deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONICR the vehicle must not be the cruise control lever, you can operateR the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC function mustDistance Pilot DISTRONIC and the variable lim-be selected ( Y page 183). indicator lamp = on the cruise control leverindicates which function you have selected:X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ?, up : or down A .R LIM indicator lamp = off: Distance PilotDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is is selectedX Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.R LIM indicator lamp = on: variable speedYour vehicle adapts its speed to that of thelimiter is selectedvehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored Distance Pilot DISTRONICi If you do not fully release the acceleratorX Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is , the Distance Pilot passive mes-If it is off, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is alreadysage appears in the multifunction display. distance to a slower-moving vehicle i
Driving systems
183
Cruise control lever
Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activation conditions
To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the fol-
lowing conditions must be fulfilled:
R the engine must be running. It may take up to
two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is ready for use.
Driving and parking
R the electric parking brake must be released.
R ESP ® must be switched on, but not interven-
ing.
R the transmission must be in position D.
R the driver's door must be closed when you
: To activate or increase speed
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
; To set the specified minimum distance
fastened.
= LIM indicator lamp
R the front-passenger door and the rear doors
? To activate at the current speed/last stored
must be closed.
speed
R the Offroad Plus drive program must be deac-
A To activate or reduce speed
tivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineer-
B To switch between Distance Pilot
ing package).
DISTRONIC and the variable limiter
R DSR must be deactivated.
C To deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
R the vehicle must not be skidding.
With the cruise control lever, you can operate
R the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC function must
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the variable lim-
be selected ( Y page 183).
iter.
Activating
LIM indicator lamp = on the cruise control lever
indicates which function you have selected:
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?, up : or down A .
R LIM indicator lamp = off: Distance Pilot
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
DISTRONIC is selected
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
R LIM indicator lamp = on: variable speed
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
limiter is selected
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
Selecting Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
i If you do not fully release the accelerator
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off.
pedal, the Distance Pilot passive mes-
If it is off, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is already
sage appears in the multifunction display. The
selected.
set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the
front will then not be maintained. The position
direction of arrow B.
of the accelerator pedal will determine the
LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control
speed.
lever goes out. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
selected.
when stationary. The lowest speed that can be
set is 30 km/h.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?, up : or down A .
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
Z
Driving systems184Activating at the current speed/lastspeed. However, the vehicle is only acceleratedup to the speed you have speedG WARNINGSelecting the drive programDistance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sportyIf you call up a stored speed and this is dif-driving style if you have selected the Sport orferent from the current speed, the vehicleSport Plus drive program ( Y page 156). Accel-accelerates or brakes. If you do not knoweration behind the vehicle in front or to the setwhat the stored speed is, the vehicle mayspeed is then noticeably more dynamic. If youDriving and parkingaccelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is ahave selected the Comfort drive program, therisk of an accelerates more gently. This setting isrecommended in stop-start the traffic conditions into accountbefore calling up the stored speed. If you doChanging lanesnot know what the stored speed is, store theIf you change to the overtaking lane, Distancedesired speed DISTRONIC supports you if:R you are driving faster than 70 km/hX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ?.R you switch on the respective turn signalX Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currentlyThe first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC isdetect a danger of collisionactivated, it stores the current speed or reg-If these conditions are met, your vehicle accel-ulates the speed of the vehicle to the storederates. Acceleration will be interrupted if lanes takes too long or if the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontDriving with Distance Pilot DISTRONICbecomes too small.i Vehicles with multimedia system: whenPulling away and drivingyou change lanes, Distance Pilot DISTRONICX If you want to pull away with Distancemonitors the right lane (on left-side traffic) orPilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from thethe left lane (on right-side traffic).brake with COMAND OnlineX Briefly pull the cruise
Driving systems
184
Activating at the current speed/last
speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated
up to the speed you have stored.
stored speed
G WARNING
Selecting the drive program
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty
If you call up a stored speed and this is dif-
driving style if you have selected the Sport or
ferent from the current speed, the vehicle
Sport Plus drive program ( Y page 156). Accel-
accelerates or brakes. If you do not know
eration behind the vehicle in front or to the set
what the stored speed is, the vehicle may
speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you
Driving and parking
accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a
have selected the Comfort drive program, the
risk of an accident.
vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is
recommended in stop-start traffic.
Take the traffic conditions into account
before calling up the stored speed. If you do
Changing lanes
not know what the stored speed is, store the
If you change to the overtaking lane, Distance
desired speed again.
Pilot DISTRONIC supports you if:
R you are driving faster than 70 km/h
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
R you switch on the respective turn signal
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently
The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
detect a danger of collision
activated, it stores the current speed or reg-
If these conditions are met, your vehicle accel-
ulates the speed of the vehicle to the stored
erates. Acceleration will be interrupted if chang-
speed.
ing lanes takes too long or if the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
becomes too small.
i Vehicles with multimedia system: when
Pulling away and driving
you change lanes, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
X If you want to pull away with Distance
monitors the right lane (on left-side traffic) or
Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the
the left lane (on right-side traffic).
brake pedal.
Vehicles with COMAND Online
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
or
X Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to
the set speed.
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-
ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
brakes automatically.
If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise
i The following function is available only in
control.
vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus
package.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slower-
moving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In
The function is not operational in all coun-
this way, the distance you have selected is main-
tries.
tained.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a faster-
moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving
Driving systems185Distance Pilot DISTRONIC uses additional infor-If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that themation from your navigation system so that itvehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehiclecan adapt to certain traffic situations. This is theto a while following a vehicle and Distance PilotOnce your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-DISTRONIC is activated and you:tionary and you do not need to depress thebrake.R approach or drive around a roundaboutAfter a short period, the vehicle is secured byR approach a T-junctionthe electric parking brake, thus relieving theR turn off at a motorway exitservice and parkingR approach a tollgateDepending on the specified minimum distance,Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detectionyour vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-range, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC temporarilycient distance behind the vehicle in front. Themaintains the current driving speed and doesspecified minimum distance is set using thenot accelerate. This is based on the current mapcontrol on the cruise control in the navigation transmission is shifted automatically toAfterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to theposition P if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONICset speed you and the vehicle stationary:The system takes into account the fact thatR the driver's door is open and the driver's seatovertaking on the right is not permitted onbelt is unfastenedmotorways or high-speed major roads at speedsR the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-of more than 80 km/h. The driving speed ismatically switched off by the ECO start/stopadjusted to the speed of the queue of vehicles infunctionthe adjacent lane to the electric parking brake secures the vehiclei Prevention of overtaking on the right appliesautomatically if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONICto countries where traffic drives on the and the vehicle stationary:In countries where traffic drives on the left
Driving systems
185
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC uses additional infor-
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the
mation from your navigation system so that it
vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle
can adapt to certain traffic situations. This is the
to a stop.
case while following a vehicle and Distance Pilot
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-
DISTRONIC is activated and you:
tionary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
R approach or drive around a roundabout
After a short period, the vehicle is secured by
R approach a T-junction
the electric parking brake, thus relieving the
R turn off at a motorway exit
service brake.
Driving and parking
R approach a tollgate
Depending on the specified minimum distance,
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection
your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-
range, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC temporarily
cient distance behind the vehicle in front. The
maintains the current driving speed and does
specified minimum distance is set using the
not accelerate. This is based on the current map
control on the cruise control lever.
data in the navigation system.
The transmission is shifted automatically to
Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the
position P if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
set speed you specified.
activated and the vehicle stationary:
The system takes into account the fact that
R the driver's door is open and the driver's seat
overtaking on the right is not permitted on
belt is unfastened
motorways or high-speed major roads at speeds
R the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
of more than 80 km/h. The driving speed is
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
adjusted to the speed of the queue of vehicles in
function
the adjacent lane to the left.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
i Prevention of overtaking on the right applies
automatically if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
to countries where traffic drives on the right.
activated and the vehicle stationary:
In countries where traffic drives on the left,
R a system fault occurs
overtaking on the left is prevented accord-
ingly.
R the power supply is insufficient
On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there is
Stopping
a malfunction, the transmission may also be
G WARNING
automatically shifted into position P.
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
Setting a speed
braked by Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, it could
roll away if:
Bear in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
R there is a malfunction in the system or in
the set speed.
the voltage supply.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
higher speed or down A for a lower speed
using the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the
cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
desired speed is reached.
R the electrical system in the engine com-
X Release the cruise control lever.
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
The new speed is stored. Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is activated and adjusts the vehi-
pered with.
cle's speed to the new speed stored.
R the battery is disconnected.
R the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle
occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
Z
Driving systems186X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONICments: briefly press the cruise control leverup : or down A to the pressure last stored speed increases or decreasesin 1 km/h increments.X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h incre-ments: briefly press the cruise control leverup : or down A beyond the pressure last stored speed increases or decreasesDriving and parkingin 10 km/h increments.i If you accelerate to overtake, Distance PilotDISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to thelast speed stored after you have finished are several ways to deactivate DistancePilot DISTRONIC:Setting the specified minimum distanceX Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards :.orX Brake, unless the vehicle is Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow =.The variable limiter is selected. LIM indicatorlamp ; in the cruise control lever lights you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,the Distance Pilot off message appears onthe multifunction display for approximately can set the specified minimum distance fori The last speed stored remains stored untilDistance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the timeyou switch off the between one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set the minimum distance thati Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivatedDistance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehi-if you depress the accelerator pedal. If youcle in front, dependent on the vehicle speed. Youaccelerate to overtake, Distance Pilotcan see this distance in the multifunction dis-DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to theplay ( Y page 187).last speed stored after you have finished over-X To increase: turn control ; in direction =. Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains aDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-greater distance between your vehicle andtivated if:the vehicle in front.R you apply the electric parking brake or if theX To d
Driving systems
186
X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-
Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
ments: briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down A to the pressure point.
The last stored speed increases or decreases
in 1 km/h increments.
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h incre-
ments: briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down A beyond the pressure point.
The last stored speed increases or decreases
Driving and parking
in 10 km/h increments.
i If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished over-
taking.
There are several ways to deactivate Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC:
Setting the specified minimum distance
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
or
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow =.
The variable limiter is selected. LIM indicator
lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up.
When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,
the Distance Pilot off message appears on
the multifunction display for approximately five
seconds.
You can set the specified minimum distance for
i The last speed stored remains stored until
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time
you switch off the engine.
span between one and two seconds. With this
function, you can set the minimum distance that
i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehi-
if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you
cle in front, dependent on the vehicle speed. You
accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
can see this distance in the multifunction dis-
DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
play ( Y page 187).
last speed stored after you have finished over-
X To increase: turn control ; in direction =.
taking.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-
greater distance between your vehicle and
tivated if:
the vehicle in front.
R you apply the electric parking brake or if the
X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.
vehicle is automatically secured with the elec-
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
tric parking brake
shorter distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
R ESP ® intervenes or you deactivate ESP ®
R the transmission is in position P, R or N
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient and
R you pull the cruise control lever towards you
safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust
in order to pull away and the front-passenger
the distance to the vehicle in front if neces-
door or one of the rear doors is open
sary.
R you activate Parking Pilot
R the vehicle is skidding
Driving systems187A warning tone sounds. The Distance PilotDisplay in the assistance graphic whenoff message will appear on the multifunctionDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivateddisplay for approximately five Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-tivated if:R you activate DSRR you activate the Off-Road Program+ (vehicleswith the Off-Road Engineering package)Driving and parkingThe à DSR symbol appears on the multi-function on the instrument clusterDisplays in the speedometer: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator: current distance to thevehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehiclein front; adjustable? Own vehicleX Select the Assistance graphic functionusing the on-board computer ( Y page 249).Display in the assistance graphic whenDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activatedExample: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in thespeedometerWhen Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated,one or two segments ; in the stored speedrange light Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle infront, segments ; between speed of the vehi-cle in front = and stored speed : light up.i For design reasons, the speed displayed inthe speedometer may differ slightly from thespeed stored for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehiclein front; adjustable= Own vehicle? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activatedX Select the Assistance graphic functionusing the on-board computer ( Y page 249).You will see the stored speed for approximatelyfive seconds when you activate Distance PilotDISTRONIC.Z
Driving systems
187
A warning tone sounds. The Distance Pilot
Display in the assistance graphic when
off message will appear on the multifunction
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
display for approximately five seconds.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-
tivated if:
R you activate DSR
R you activate the Off-Road Program+ (vehicles
with the Off-Road Engineering package)
Driving and parking
The à DSR symbol appears on the multi-
function display.
Displays on the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Distance indicator: current distance to the
vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
? Own vehicle
X Select the Assistance graphic function
using the on-board computer ( Y page 249).
Display in the assistance graphic when
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
Example: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in the
speedometer
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated,
one or two segments ; in the stored speed
range light up.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
front, segments ; between speed of the vehi-
cle in front = and stored speed : light up.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed in
the speedometer may differ slightly from the
speed stored for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
= Own vehicle
? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated
X Select the Assistance graphic function
using the on-board computer ( Y page 249).
You will see the stored speed for approximately
five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC.
Z
Driving systems188Tips for driving with Distance PilotDistance Pilot DISTRONIC with SteeringDISTRONICPilotGeneral notesGeneral notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:R Cornering, entering and exiting a bend: theability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detectDriving and parkingvehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehi-cle may brake unexpectedly or late.R Driving on a different line: Distance PilotDISTRONIC may not detect vehicles driving ina different lane. The distance to the vehicle infront will be too short.R Other vehicles changing lane: Distance PilotDISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cut-ting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will beDistance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilottoo you in keeping the vehicle in the centre ofthe driving lane by means of moderate steeringR Narrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONICinterventions in a speed range fromdoes not detect the vehicle in front on the0 - 200 km/ of the carriageway because of its narrowwidth. The distance to the vehicle in front willIt monitors the area in front of your vehicle bybe too of camera system : at the top of thewindscreen.R Obstacles and stationary vehicles: DistancePilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstaclesIn a speed range from 0 - 60 km/h, the extendedor stationary vehicles. If, for example, theautomatic Re-start in traffic jams focuses on thedetected vehicle turns a corner and an obsta-vehicle in front, taking into account lane mark-cle or stationary vehicle is revealed, Distanceings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic DISTRONIC will not brake for speeds of more than 60 km/h, Steering PilotR Crossing traffic: Distance Pilot DISTRONICfocuses on detected lane markings (left andmay mistakenly detect vehicles that areright), only focusing on the vehicle in front ifcrossing your lane. Activating Distance Pilotdetected lane markings are not at, for example, a traffic light withIf these condition
Driving systems
188
Tips for driving with Distance Pilot
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering
DISTRONIC
Pilot
General notes
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
R Cornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect
Driving and parking
vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehi-
cle may brake unexpectedly or late.
R Driving on a different line: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles driving in
a different lane. The distance to the vehicle in
front will be too short.
R Other vehicles changing lane: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cut-
ting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
too short.
aids you in keeping the vehicle in the centre of
the driving lane by means of moderate steering
R Narrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
interventions in a speed range from
does not detect the vehicle in front on the
0 - 200 km/h.
edge of the carriageway because of its narrow
width. The distance to the vehicle in front will
It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by
be too short.
means of camera system : at the top of the
windscreen.
R Obstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles
In a speed range from 0 - 60 km/h, the extended
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
automatic Re-start in traffic jams focuses on the
detected vehicle turns a corner and an obsta-
vehicle in front, taking into account lane mark-
cle or stationary vehicle is revealed, Distance
ings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam.
Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for them.
At speeds of more than 60 km/h, Steering Pilot
R Crossing traffic: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
focuses on detected lane markings (left and
may mistakenly detect vehicles that are
right), only focusing on the vehicle in front if
crossing your lane. Activating Distance Pilot
detected lane markings are not present.
DISTRONIC at, for example, a traffic light with
If these conditions are not present, Steering
crossing traffic, could cause your vehicle to
Pilot cannot provide assistance.
pull away at the wrong time.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be active in
In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance
order for the function to be available.
Pilot DISTRONIC is then switched off.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC and Steering Pilot can neither
reduce the risk of an accident nor override the
laws of physics. It cannot take into account
road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in lane.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
does not detect road and traffic conditions and
does not detect all road users. If you are follow-
ing a vehicle that is driving towards the edge of
the carriageway, your vehicle could come into
contact with the kerb or other road boundaries.
Driving systems189Be particularly aware of other road users, Pilot cannot provide assistance:cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle.R on very sharp cornersObstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane orR when you are towing a trailerprojecting out into the lane are not detected.R a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre hasAn inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. afterbeen detected and displayedintentionally driving over a lane marking, can beObserve the important safety notes on Distancecorrected at any time if you steer slightly in thePilot DISTRONIC ( Y page 182).opposite steering interventions are carried out with aDistance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering PilotDriving and parkinglimited steering moment. The system requirescannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. Inthe driver to keep his hands on the steeringsome cases, the steering intervention is not suf-wheel and to steer to bring the vehicle back to the lane. InIf you do not steer yourself or if you take yoursuch cases, you must steer the vehicle yourselfhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedto ensure that it does not leave the of time, the system will first alert you withThe system may be impaired in the followinga visual warning. A steering wheel symbolsituations:appears on the multifunction display. If you haveR poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumi-still not started to steer and have not taken holdnation of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog orof the steering wheel after five seconds at thespraylatest, a warning tone also sounds to remind youR there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, theto take control of the vehicle. Steering Pilot issun or reflections (e.g. if the road surface isthen switched to passive. Distance Pilotwet)DISTRONIC remains active.R the windscreen is dirty, misted up, damagedActivating Steering Pilotor covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g.X Activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC withby a sti
Driving systems
189
Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g.
Steering Pilot cannot provide assistance:
cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle.
R on very sharp corners
Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or
R when you are towing a trailer
projecting out into the lane are not detected.
R a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after
been detected and displayed
intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be
Observe the important safety notes on Distance
corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the
Pilot DISTRONIC ( Y page 182).
opposite direction.
The steering interventions are carried out with a
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
Driving and parking
limited steering moment. The system requires
cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In
the driver to keep his hands on the steering
some cases, the steering intervention is not suf-
wheel and to steer himself.
ficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In
If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself
hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
to ensure that it does not leave the lane.
period of time, the system will first alert you with
The system may be impaired in the following
a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol
situations:
appears on the multifunction display. If you have
R poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumi-
still not started to steer and have not taken hold
nation of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or
of the steering wheel after five seconds at the
spray
latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you
R there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
to take control of the vehicle. Steering Pilot is
sun or reflections (e.g. if the road surface is
then switched to passive. Distance Pilot
wet)
DISTRONIC remains active.
R the windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged
Activating Steering Pilot
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g.
X Activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
by a sticker
Steering Pilot using the on-board computer
R there are no lane markings, or several unclear
( Y page 250).
lane markings are present for one lane, e.g.
The Steering Pilot On message appears
around construction sites
on the multifunction display. Steering Pilot is
R the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
activated.
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R the distance to the vehicle in front is too short
Information on the multifunction display
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
ted
R the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
R the road is narrow and winding
R there are highly variable shade conditions on
the road
The system is switched to passive and no longer
assists you by performing steering interventions
If Steering Pilot is activated but not ready for a
if:
steering intervention, steering wheel symbol :
appears in grey. If the system provides you with
R you actively change lane
support by means of steering interventions,
R you switch on the turn signal
symbol : is shown in green.
R you take your hands off the steering wheel or
Deactivating Steering Pilot
do not steer for a prolonged period of time
X Deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
i After you have finished changing lanes,
Steering Pilot using the on-board computer
Steering Pilot is automatically active once
( Y page 250).
more.
The Steering Pilot Off message appears
on the multifunction display. Steering Pilot is
deactivated.
Z
Driving systems190When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivatedAlways select as low a vehicle level as possi-or not available, Steering Pilot is deactivatedble and adjust your driving style .G WARNINGLevel control (vehicles with the Off-When driving with a lowered or raised chassisRoad Engineering package)frame, the driving and braking characteristicsmay be seriously affected. A raised chassisImportant safety notesframe may also exceed the permissible vehi-Driving and parkingcle height. There is a risk of an control adapts the vehicle level automati-cally to the current operating and driving situa-Set the driving level before pulling . This results in reduced fuel consumptionand improved handling.G WARNINGMake changes to the vehicle level while theDue to the high centre of gravity, the vehiclevehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle tomay start to skid and overturn in the event ofadjust to the new level as quickly as steering manoeuvres and/or when theThe vehicle level may change visibly if you parkvehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadthe vehicle and the outside temperatureconditions. There is a risk of an . If the temperature drops, the vehiclelevel lowers; with an increase in temperature,Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle level vehicle's driving characteristics and to theIf you unlock the vehicle or open a door, theprevailing road and weather begins to compensate for load discrep-ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-! When driving on extremely rough terrain,cant level changes, e.g. after the vehicle hasselect a high vehicle level in good time. Makebeen stationary for a long period, the enginesure there is always sufficient ground clear-must be running. For safety reasons, the vehicleance. You will otherwise damage the only lowered when the doors are closed. Low-R SUVs overturn considerably more often tha
Driving systems
190
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
Always select as low a vehicle level as possi-
or not available, Steering Pilot is deactivated
ble and adjust your driving style accordingly.
automatically.
G WARNING
Level control (vehicles with the Off-
When driving with a lowered or raised chassis
Road Engineering package)
frame, the driving and braking characteristics
may be seriously affected. A raised chassis
Important safety notes
frame may also exceed the permissible vehi-
Driving and parking
cle height. There is a risk of an accident.
Level control adapts the vehicle level automati-
cally to the current operating and driving situa-
Set the driving level before pulling away.
tion. This results in reduced fuel consumption
and improved handling.
G WARNING
Make changes to the vehicle level while the
Due to the high centre of gravity, the vehicle
vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to
may start to skid and overturn in the event of
adjust to the new level as quickly as possible.
abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the
The vehicle level may change visibly if you park
vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
the vehicle and the outside temperature
conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle
level lowers; with an increase in temperature,
Always adapt your speed and driving style to
the vehicle level rises.
the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
vehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-
ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-
! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
cant level changes, e.g. after the vehicle has
select a high vehicle level in good time. Make
been stationary for a long period, the engine
sure there is always sufficient ground clear-
must be running. For safety reasons, the vehicle
ance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.
is only lowered when the doors are closed. Low-
R SUVs overturn considerably more often than
ering is interrupted if a door is opened; it con-
other vehicle types.
tinues once the door has been closed.
If this vehicle is not driven in a safe manner, it
Further information about "Driving off-road"
can lead to an accident, to the vehicle over-
( Y page 173).
turning as well as serious or even fatal inju-
G WARNING
ries.
People's limbs may become trapped if they
R In the event of an accident with the vehicle
overturning, passengers who are not wearing
are located underneath the vehicle or
their seat belt are considerably more likely to
between the vehicle body and the tyres when
die than passengers wearing their seat belt.
the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of
You and all vehicle occupants should always
injury.
wear your seat belts.
When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one
is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate
Basic settings
vicinity of the wheel arches.
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or low-
G WARNING
ered depends on the basic setting selected.
Select:
When driving at a raised vehicle level, the driv-
R the Comfort or Sport drive program for driv-
ing characteristics may be significantly affec-
ing on normal roads
ted by the vehicle's raised centre of gravity.
R the Offroad drive program for driving on eas-
The vehicle may be more liable to tip when
ily negotiable off-road terrain
cornering, for example. There is a risk of an
R the Offroad Plus drive program for off-road
accident.
driving
Driving systems191R Offroad level 1 for driving on easily negotiableIf you press the % or a button on theoff-road terrainmultifunction steering wheel, the message willdisappear. Once normal level has been reached,R Offroad level 2 for driving on normal off-roadall indicator lamps = go vehicle automatically selects normal level ifR Offroad level 3 for freeing the vehicle fromyou:especially difficult off-road terrain at lowspeedsR drive at speeds above 115 km/h orThe individual vehicle levels differ from the nor-R drive at speeds between 100 km/h andmal level as follows:115 km/h for approximately 20 secondsDriving and parkingR –15 mm in the Sport drive programThe vehicle is lowered to low level if you aretravelling at higher speeds.R +/–0 mm in the Comfort drive programR + 30 mm in the Offroad drive programNormal levelR + 60 mm in the Offroad Plus drive programR + 30 mm in offroad level 1R + 60 mm in offroad level 2R + 90 mm in offroad level 3Setting the vehicle level! Make sure there is enough ground clear-ance when the vehicle is being lowered. Itcould otherwise hit the ground, damaging the vehicle to normal levelX Start the engine.X Press selector wheel :.Selector wheel : extends.X To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel :anti-clockwise ?.The vehicle is one or more indicator lamps = are on:X Turn selector wheel : anti-clockwise ?until all indicator lamps = that are lit start toSetting the vehicle level using the vehicle is lowered to normal level. AsX Start the as the next lowest level is reached, theX Press selector wheel :.indicator lamp stops flashing and goes wheel : extends.X To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel :Offroad levelsclockwise ;.The vehicle is notesX To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel :Only select an offroad level if this is appropriateanti-clockwise ?.for road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consump-The vehicle is may
Driving systems
191
R Offroad level 1 for driving on easily negotiable
If you press the % or a button on the
off-road terrain
multifunction steering wheel, the message will
disappear. Once normal level has been reached,
R Offroad level 2 for driving on normal off-road
all indicator lamps = go out.
terrain
The vehicle automatically selects normal level if
R Offroad level 3 for freeing the vehicle from
you:
especially difficult off-road terrain at low
speeds
R drive at speeds above 115 km/h or
The individual vehicle levels differ from the nor-
R drive at speeds between 100 km/h and
mal level as follows:
115 km/h for approximately 20 seconds
Driving and parking
R –15 mm in the Sport drive program
The vehicle is lowered to low level if you are
travelling at higher speeds.
R +/–0 mm in the Comfort drive program
R + 30 mm in the Offroad drive program
Normal level
R + 60 mm in the Offroad Plus drive program
R + 30 mm in offroad level 1
R + 60 mm in offroad level 2
R + 90 mm in offroad level 3
Setting the vehicle level
! Make sure there is enough ground clear-
ance when the vehicle is being lowered. It
could otherwise hit the ground, damaging the
underbody.
Setting the vehicle to normal level
X Start the engine.
X Press selector wheel :.
Selector wheel : extends.
X To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
anti-clockwise ?.
The vehicle is lowered.
If one or more indicator lamps = are on:
X Turn selector wheel : anti-clockwise ?
until all indicator lamps = that are lit start to
Setting the vehicle level using the selector
flash.
wheel
The vehicle is lowered to normal level. As
X Start the engine.
soon as the next lowest level is reached, the
X Press selector wheel :.
indicator lamp stops flashing and goes out.
Selector wheel : extends.
X To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
Offroad levels
clockwise ;.
The vehicle is raised.
General notes
X To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
Only select an offroad level if this is appropriate
anti-clockwise ?.
for road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consump-
The vehicle is lowered.
tion may increase and handling performance
During the adjustment, the Lowering or Vehi‐
may be affected.
cle rising message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
Z
Driving systems192You can select the following:If you press the % or a button on themultifunction steering wheel, the message willR Offroad level 1 at speeds up to 100 km/hdisappear.R Offroad level 2 at speeds up to 65 km/hi Up to offroad level 2, you can hide the mes-R Offroad level 3 at speeds up to 20 km/hsages using the % or a button on theIf you select an offroad level when driving at toomultifunction steering a speed, the Please reduce speed mes-sage appears in the multifunction the adjustment from offroad level 2 to off-road level 3 is taking place, you will see a mes-Offroad level 3 is only suitable for driving onDriving and parkingsage such as the following in the multifunctionextremely difficult off-road terrain under partic-display: Vehicle rising Max. speedularly rough conditions.20 km/h .R Adjust your driving style to the altered han-The Max. speed 20 km/h message draws yourdling to the maximum speed permitted forR Do not drive faster than 20 km/ level 3.If you drive above 20 km/h at offroad level 3,you will see the following message shown in redin the multifunction display: Lowering 20 km/h .i You cannot clear these also hear a warning tone. The vehicle is low-ered and offroad level 3 is you continue to increase your speed, the redmessage continues to be shown in the multi-function display. The newly set level is not dis-played until the vehicle has been set to a levelIndicator lamps = for the desired offroad levelsuitable for the current :Lowering the vehicleR the lower indicator lamp flashes, offroadIf you drive faster than 20 km/h while the vehi-level 1 is selectedcle is being lowered, you will see the followingR the lower and centre indicator lamps flash,message shown in white in the multifunctionoffroad level 2 is selecteddisplay: Lowering Max. speed 20 km/h .R all three indicator lamps flash, offroad level 3The vehicle is lowered to offroad
Driving systems
192
You can select the following:
If you press the % or a button on the
multifunction steering wheel, the message will
R Offroad level 1 at speeds up to 100 km/h
disappear.
R Offroad level 2 at speeds up to 65 km/h
i Up to offroad level 2, you can hide the mes-
R Offroad level 3 at speeds up to 20 km/h
sages using the % or a button on the
If you select an offroad level when driving at too
multifunction steering wheel.
high a speed, the Please reduce speed mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
While the adjustment from offroad level 2 to off-
road level 3 is taking place, you will see a mes-
Offroad level 3 is only suitable for driving on
Driving and parking
sage such as the following in the multifunction
extremely difficult off-road terrain under partic-
display: Vehicle rising Max. speed
ularly rough conditions.
20 km/h .
R Adjust your driving style to the altered han-
The Max. speed 20 km/h message draws your
dling characteristics.
attention to the maximum speed permitted for
R Do not drive faster than 20 km/h.
offroad level 3.
If you drive above 20 km/h at offroad level 3,
you will see the following message shown in red
in the multifunction display: Lowering Max.
speed 20 km/h .
i You cannot clear these messages.
You also hear a warning tone. The vehicle is low-
ered and offroad level 3 is cancelled.
If you continue to increase your speed, the red
message continues to be shown in the multi-
function display. The newly set level is not dis-
played until the vehicle has been set to a level
Indicator lamps = for the desired offroad level
suitable for the current speed.
flash:
Lowering the vehicle
R the lower indicator lamp flashes, offroad
If you drive faster than 20 km/h while the vehi-
level 1 is selected
cle is being lowered, you will see the following
R the lower and centre indicator lamps flash,
message shown in white in the multifunction
offroad level 2 is selected
display: Lowering Max. speed 20 km/h .
R all three indicator lamps flash, offroad level 3
The vehicle is lowered to offroad level 2.
is selected
You will see a message in the multifunction dis-
The vehicle is being adjusted to the offroad level
play, for example: Lowering .
selected. As soon as an offroad level is reached,
Off-road level 2 is cancelled and the vehicle is
the corresponding indicator lamp stops flashing
lowered to offroad level 1 if you:
and lights up constantly.
R drive at speeds above 80 km/h or
Raising the vehicle
R drive at speeds between 65 km/h and
Setting the vehicle level using the selector
80 km/h for longer than 20 seconds
wheel
Off-road level 1 is cancelled. Depending on the
X To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
vehicle's speed and the selected drive program,
clockwise ;.
the vehicle is automatically lowered to normal
The vehicle is raised to offroad level 1 by
level or low level if you:
30 mm compared to the normal level.
R drive at speeds above 115 km/h or
During the adjustment, the Vehicle rising
R drive at speeds between 100 km/h and
message, for example, appears in the multifunc-
115 km/h for longer than 20 seconds
tion display.
Driving systems193Activation conditionsHOLD functionYou can activate the HOLD function if:General notesR the vehicle is stationaryThe HOLD function can assist the driver in theR the engine is running or if it has been auto-following situations:matically switched off by the ECO start/stopR when pulling away, especially on steep slopesfunctionR when manoeuvring on steep slopesR the driver's door is closed or if your seat beltis fastenedR when waiting in trafficDriving and parkingR the electric parking brake is releasedThe vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.R the transmission is in position h, k or iThe braking effect is cancelled and the HOLDR Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivatedfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull the HOLD functioni Do not use the HOLD function when drivingoff-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradientsor on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLDfunction cannot hold the vehicle on such safety notesG WARNINGX Make sure that the activation conditions areIf the vehicle is only braked using the , the vehicle may roll away in the fol-X Depress the brake situations when you leave the vehicle:X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil : appears on the multifunction display.R if there is a malfunction in the system or inThe HOLD function is activated. You canthe voltage supplyrelease the brake pedal.R if the HOLD function is deactivated byi If depressing the brake pedal the first timedepressing the accelerator pedal or brakedoes not activate the HOLD function, waitpedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupantbriefly and then try again.R if the electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-Deactivating the HOLD functionpered with or the battery is disconnectedThe HOLD function is deactivated automaticallyThere is a risk of an :Always deactivate the HOLD function andR you depress the acc
Driving systems
193
Activation conditions
HOLD function
You can activate the HOLD function if:
General notes
R the vehicle is stationary
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
R the engine is running or if it has been auto-
following situations:
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
R when pulling away, especially on steep slopes
function
R when manoeuvring on steep slopes
R the driver's door is closed or if your seat belt
is fastened
R when waiting in traffic
Driving and parking
R the electric parking brake is released
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal.
R the transmission is in position h, k or i
The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Activating the HOLD function
i Do not use the HOLD function when driving
off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients
or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD
function cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-
faces.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
X Make sure that the activation conditions are
If the vehicle is only braked using the HOLD
met.
function, the vehicle may roll away in the fol-
X Depress the brake pedal.
lowing situations when you leave the vehicle:
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until : appears on the multifunction display.
R if there is a malfunction in the system or in
The HOLD function is activated. You can
the voltage supply
release the brake pedal.
R if the HOLD function is deactivated by
i If depressing the brake pedal the first time
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
does not activate the HOLD function, wait
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant
briefly and then try again.
R if the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
Deactivating the HOLD function
pered with or the battery is disconnected
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically
There is a risk of an accident.
if:
Always deactivate the HOLD function and
R you depress the accelerator and the trans-
secure the vehicle against rolling away before
mission is in position h or k
you leave it.
R you shift the transmission to position j
R you depress the brake pedal again with a cer-
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
tain amount of pressure until : disappears
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
from the multifunction display
brakes automatically in certain situations.
R you secure the vehicle using the electric park-
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
ing brake
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
R you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
function in the following or similar situations:
i After a short period, the vehicle is secured
R when towing away
by the electric parking brake, thus relieving
R in a car wash
the service brake.
Deactivate the HOLD function ( Y page 193).
Z
Driving systems194Important safety notesWhen the HOLD function is activated, the trans-mission is automatically shifted to position jG WARNINGif:R the driver's door is open and the driver's seatPeople's limbs may become trapped if theybelt is unfastenedare located underneath the vehicle orR the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-between the vehicle body and the tyres whenmatically switched off by the ECO start/stopthe vehicle is lowering. There is a danger and parkingThe electric parking brake secures the vehicleWhen lowering the vehicle, make sure no oneautomatically if the HOLD function is activated,is underneath the vehicle or in the immediatethe vehicle is stationary and:vicinity of the wheel arches.R a system fault occursR the power supply is insufficientIf you unlock the vehicle or open a door, theOn steep uphill or downhill gradients or if therevehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-is a malfunction, the transmission may also beancies while still parked. However, for signifi-automatically shifted to position level changes, e.g. after the vehicle hasbeen stationary for a long period, the enginemust be running. For safety reasons, the vehicleis lowered only when the doors are closed. Low-AIRMATIC packageering is interrupted if a door is opened; it con-General notestinues once the door has been is an air suspension system with var-ADS and ADS PLUS (Adaptive Dampingiable damping for improved driving )Level control ensures the best possible suspen-sion and constant ground clearance, even with aGeneral notesladen vehicle. When you drive at speed, thevehicle is lowered automatically to improve driv-The Adaptive Damping System automaticallying safety and to reduce fuel consumption. Youcontrols the calibration of the dampers. Thealso have the option of manually adjusting thedamping characteristics adapt to the currentvehicle and driving consists of:The dampin
Driving systems
194
Important safety notes
When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-
mission is automatically shifted to position j
G WARNING
if:
R the driver's door is open and the driver's seat
People's limbs may become trapped if they
belt is unfastened
are located underneath the vehicle or
R the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
between the vehicle body and the tyres when
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of
function
injury.
Driving and parking
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one
automatically if the HOLD function is activated,
is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate
the vehicle is stationary and:
vicinity of the wheel arches.
R a system fault occurs
R the power supply is insufficient
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
On steep uphill or downhill gradients or if there
vehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-
is a malfunction, the transmission may also be
ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-
automatically shifted to position j.
cant level changes, e.g. after the vehicle has
been stationary for a long period, the engine
must be running. For safety reasons, the vehicle
is lowered only when the doors are closed. Low-
AIRMATIC package
ering is interrupted if a door is opened; it con-
General notes
tinues once the door has been closed.
AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with var-
ADS and ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping
iable damping for improved driving comfort.
System)
Level control ensures the best possible suspen-
sion and constant ground clearance, even with a
General notes
laden vehicle. When you drive at speed, the
vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driv-
The Adaptive Damping System automatically
ing safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You
controls the calibration of the dampers. The
also have the option of manually adjusting the
damping characteristics adapt to the current
vehicle level.
operating and driving situation.
AIRMATIC consists of:
The damping is adjusted individually to each
wheel and depends on:
R level settings
R your driving style, e.g. sporty
R level control and
R the road surface conditions
R ADS or ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping Sys-
tem)
R the drive program selected
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
R the vehicle level setting
cles): your vehicle may also be equipped with
Selecting Comfort mode
the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM ( Y page 195).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: your vehicle is equip-
ped with the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM.
( Y page 195).
Observe the notes on driving with a trailer
( Y page 232).
The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC
SELECT controller ( Y page 151) or the level but-
ton ( Y page 196). The setting always corre-
sponds to the last function selected.
Driving systems195In the Comfort drive program, the driving char-X Select the Sport drive program usingacteristics of your vehicle are more comforta-DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-ble. Therefore, select this drive program if youcles): the vehicle is lowered by 15 mm com-prefer a more comfortable driving style. Alsoselect the Comfort drive program when drivingpared with the normal speed on straight roads, e.g. on straightMercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehiclestretches of at the normal level.X Select the Comfort drive program usingSelecting Sport Plus tuning (Mercedes-DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.Driving and parkingAMG vehicles)the vehicle is adjusted to the normal vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): in the Comfort drive program, the vehicleis lowered by 15 mm if you:R drive at speeds above 140 km/h orR drive at speeds between 120 km/h and140 km/h for longer than 20 secondsThe vehicle is raised again if you:R drive at speeds below 40 km/h orR drive at speeds between 40 km/h and70 km/h for longer than 20 secondsMercedes-AMG vehicles: in the Comfort driveThe very firm suspension tuning in the Sportprogram, the vehicle is:Plus drive program ensures the best possibleR lowered by 10 mm if you drive at speedscontact with the road. Select this mode whenabove 180 km/hemploying a sporty driving style, e.g. on windingR raised again if you drive at speeds belowcountry roads or, ideally, when driving on closed140 km/hrace is not available in the Sport Plus drive pro-Selecting Sport modegram. Further information on DSR( Y page 225).X Select the Sport Plus drive program usingDYNAMIC SELECT controller :.The vehicle is lowered by 10 mm comparedwith the normal CURVE SYSTEMThe ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM uses active stabil-isers to optimise both driving comfort and vehi-cle dynamics. Depending on the drive programselected ( Y page 156), the ACTIVE CURVE SYS-The firmer suspension setting in the Sp
Driving systems
195
In the Comfort drive program, the driving char-
X Select the Sport drive program using
acteristics of your vehicle are more comforta-
DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
ble. Therefore, select this drive program if you
cles): the vehicle is lowered by 15 mm com-
prefer a more comfortable driving style. Also
select the Comfort drive program when driving
pared with the normal level.
at speed on straight roads, e.g. on straight
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle
stretches of motorway.
remains at the normal level.
X Select the Comfort drive program using
Selecting Sport Plus tuning (Mercedes-
DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.
Driving and parking
AMG vehicles)
the vehicle is adjusted to the normal level.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): in the Comfort drive program, the vehicle
is lowered by 15 mm if you:
R drive at speeds above 140 km/h or
R drive at speeds between 120 km/h and
140 km/h for longer than 20 seconds
The vehicle is raised again if you:
R drive at speeds below 40 km/h or
R drive at speeds between 40 km/h and
70 km/h for longer than 20 seconds
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: in the Comfort drive
The very firm suspension tuning in the Sport
program, the vehicle is:
Plus drive program ensures the best possible
R lowered by 10 mm if you drive at speeds
contact with the road. Select this mode when
above 180 km/h
employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding
R raised again if you drive at speeds below
country roads or, ideally, when driving on closed
140 km/h
race circuits.
DSR is not available in the Sport Plus drive pro-
Selecting Sport mode
gram. Further information on DSR
( Y page 225).
X Select the Sport Plus drive program using
DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.
The vehicle is lowered by 10 mm compared
with the normal level.
ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM
The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM uses active stabil-
isers to optimise both driving comfort and vehi-
cle dynamics. Depending on the drive program
selected ( Y page 156), the ACTIVE CURVE SYS-
The firmer suspension setting in the Sport drive
TEM also changes the setting.
program ensures even better contact with the
If you have selected the Comfort drive program:
road. Select this drive program when employing
a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country
R rolling movement is reduced in the event of
roads.
varying surface undulation
DSR is not available in the Sport drive program.
R the roll angle is reduced during cornering
Further information on DSR ( Y page 225).
R the handling characteristics are dynamic
Z
Driving systems196If you have selected the Sport drive program:vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadR the roll angle is reduced significantlyconditions. There is a risk of an accident.R the handling characteristics are even moreAlways adapt your speed and driving style todynamicthe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theMercedes-AMG vehicles: if you have selectedprevailing road and weather Sport Plus drive program:! When driving on extremely rough terrain,R the roll angle is again reduced significantlyselect a high vehicle level in good time. MakeR the handling characteristics are designed toDriving and parkingsure there is always sufficient ground clear-offer maximum dynamicsance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.R SUVs have a significantly higher rollover rateVehicle levelthan other types of safety notesIf this type of vehicle is not driven safely, anaccident can occur, the vehicle can overturnG WARNINGand occupants can suffer serious or even 's limbs may become trapped if theyare located underneath the vehicle orR In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-nificantly more likely to die than a personbetween the vehicle body and the tyres whenwearing a seat vehicle is lowering. There is a danger ofYou and all vehicle occupants should your seat lowering the vehicle, make sure no oneGeneral notesis underneath the vehicle or in the immediatevicinity of the wheel raised level only if this is appropriate forthe road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consump-G WARNINGtion may increase and handling may be changes to the vehicle level while theWhen driving at a raised vehicle level, the driv-vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle toing characteristics may be significantly affec-adjust to the new level as quickly as by the vehicle's raised centre of vehicle level may change visibly if you parkThe vehicle may be
Driving systems
196
If you have selected the Sport drive program:
vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
R the roll angle is reduced significantly
conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
R the handling characteristics are even more
Always adapt your speed and driving style to
dynamic
the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you have selected
prevailing road and weather conditions.
the Sport Plus drive program:
! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
R the roll angle is again reduced significantly
select a high vehicle level in good time. Make
R the handling characteristics are designed to
Driving and parking
sure there is always sufficient ground clear-
offer maximum dynamics
ance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.
R SUVs have a significantly higher rollover rate
Vehicle level
than other types of vehicle.
Important safety notes
If this type of vehicle is not driven safely, an
accident can occur, the vehicle can overturn
G WARNING
and occupants can suffer serious or even fatal
injuries.
People's limbs may become trapped if they
are located underneath the vehicle or
R In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
nificantly more likely to die than a person
between the vehicle body and the tyres when
wearing a seat belt.
the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of
You and all vehicle occupants should always
injury.
wear your seat belts.
When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one
General notes
is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate
vicinity of the wheel arches.
Select raised level only if this is appropriate for
the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consump-
G WARNING
tion may increase and handling may be affected.
Make changes to the vehicle level while the
When driving at a raised vehicle level, the driv-
vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to
ing characteristics may be significantly affec-
adjust to the new level as quickly as possible.
ted by the vehicle's raised centre of gravity.
The vehicle level may change visibly if you park
The vehicle may be more liable to tip when
the vehicle and the outside temperature
cornering, for example. There is a risk of an
changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle
accident.
level lowers; if the temperature increases, the
vehicle level rises.
Always select as low a vehicle level as possi-
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
ble and adjust your driving style accordingly.
vehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-
ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-
G WARNING
cant level changes, e.g. after the vehicle has
When driving with a lowered or raised chassis
been stationary for a long period, the engine
must be running. For safety reasons, the vehicle
frame, the driving and braking characteristics
is lowered only when the doors are closed. Low-
may be seriously affected. A raised chassis
ering is interrupted if a door is opened; it con-
frame may also exceed the permissible vehi-
tinues once the door has been closed.
cle height. There is a risk of an accident.
Vehicles with no trailer coupled: below a
Set the driving level before pulling away.
speed of 65 km/h, you can choose between
normal and raised vehicle levels. Select the nor-
G WARNING
mal vehicle level for normal road conditions and
the raised vehicle level when using snow chains
Due to the high centre of gravity, the vehicle
or if the road conditions are very poor. Your
may start to skid and overturn in the event of
selection remains stored even if you remove the
abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the
key from the ignition lock. If you try to select
raised level at a speed above 65 km/h, the
Driving systems197Please reduce speed message appears onR Mercedes-AMG vehicles: You drive forthe multifunction 20 seconds between 65 km/hand 70 km/ with a trailer coupled: below a speedof 30 km/h, you can choose between the nor-R You drive with a trailer at speeds greater thanmal and raised vehicle level.30 km/ raised level remains saved when you are notSetting the raised vehicle leveldriving within these speed the normal vehicle levelDriving and parking! Make sure there is enough ground clear-ance when the vehicle is being lowered. Itcould otherwise hit the ground, damaging theunderbody.X Start the indicator lamp ; is lit:X Press button :.Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle isbeing lowered, and goes out as soon as thedesired vehicle level is reached.X Start the with no trailer coupled: the vehi-If indicator lamp ; is not lit:cle is adjusted to the height of the selectedX Press button :.drive program ( Y page 151).Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle isVehicles with a trailer coupled: the vehiclebeing raised, and lights up continuously asis adjusted to normal level regardless of thesoon as the vehicle reaches the desired program selected ( Y page 151). TheAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-vehicle remains at normal level even if youcles): the vehicle is raised by 60 mm com-change drive with the normal adjustment, the Lowering messageMercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle isappears on the multifunction by 50 mm compared with the normalIf you press the % or a button on steering wheel, the message willThe Vehicle rising message appears on message remains until the raised level RIDE CONTROLIf you press the % or a button on theGeneral notesmultifunction steering wheel, the message willdisappear.i AMG RIDE CONTROL is available forThe raised vehicle leve
Driving systems
197
Please reduce speed message appears on
R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: You drive for
the multifunction display.
approximately 20 seconds between 65 km/h
and 70 km/h.
Vehicles with a trailer coupled: below a speed
of 30 km/h, you can choose between the nor-
R You drive with a trailer at speeds greater than
mal and raised vehicle level.
30 km/h.
The raised level remains saved when you are not
Setting the raised vehicle level
driving within these speed ranges.
Setting the normal vehicle level
Driving and parking
! Make sure there is enough ground clear-
ance when the vehicle is being lowered. It
could otherwise hit the ground, damaging the
underbody.
X Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle is
being lowered, and goes out as soon as the
desired vehicle level is reached.
X Start the engine.
Vehicles with no trailer coupled: the vehi-
If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
cle is adjusted to the height of the selected
X Press button :.
drive program ( Y page 151).
Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle is
Vehicles with a trailer coupled: the vehicle
being raised, and lights up continuously as
is adjusted to normal level regardless of the
soon as the vehicle reaches the desired level.
drive program selected ( Y page 151). The
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
vehicle remains at normal level even if you
cles): the vehicle is raised by 60 mm com-
change drive programs.
pared with the normal level.
During adjustment, the Lowering message
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle is
appears on the multifunction display.
raised by 50 mm compared with the normal
If you press the % or a button on the
level.
multifunction steering wheel, the message will
The Vehicle rising message appears on the
disappear.
multifunction display.
The message remains until the raised level is
reached.
AMG RIDE CONTROL
If you press the % or a button on the
General notes
multifunction steering wheel, the message will
disappear.
i AMG RIDE CONTROL is available for
The raised vehicle level setting is cancelled in
Mercedes-AMG vehicles and for the
the following cases:
Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC.
R you are driving faster than 80 km/h
The electronically controlled damping system
R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: you are driving
works continuously. This improves driving
faster than 70 km/h.
safety and ride comfort.
R All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
cles): You drive for approximately 20 seconds
and depends on:
between 65 km/h and 80 km/h.
R your driving style, e.g. sporty
R the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
R your individual selection of Sport, Sport + or
Comfort
Z
Driving systems198Comfort modeThe suspension setting can be adjusted usingbutton : in the centre console or the DYNAMICIn Comfort mode, the driving characteristics ofSELECT controller ( Y page 151).your vehicle are more comfortable. Select thisIf the ignition is switched off for less than fourmode if you prefer a more comfortable drivinghours, the previously selected drive program isstyle, but also when driving at speed on straightactivated when the engine is next started. If theroads, e.g. is switched off for more than four hours,X Press button : repeatedly until indicatorComfort mode is activated when the engine islamps ; and = go and parkingYou have selected Comfort AMG Ride Control COMFORT messageSport modeappears in the multifunction Parking AssistImportant safety notesParking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronicparking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the areaaround your vehicle using six sensors in thefront bumper and six sensors in the rearbumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visuallyand audibly indicates the distance between yourvehicle and an firmer setting of the suspension tuning inParking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It isSport mode ensures even better contact withnot a substitute for your attention to the imme-the road. Select this mode when employing adiate surroundings. The responsibility for safesporty driving style, e.g. on winding countrymanoeuvring and parking remains with sure that there are no persons, animals orX Press button : repeatedly until indicatorobjects in range while manoeuvring and = lights have selected Sport mode.! When parking, pay particular attention toThe AMG Ride Control SPORT messageobjects above or below the sensors, such asflower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONICappears in the multifunction not detect such objects when they are inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle. YouSport + modecould dam
Driving systems
198
Comfort mode
The suspension setting can be adjusted using
button : in the centre console or the DYNAMIC
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of
SELECT controller ( Y page 151).
your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this
If the ignition is switched off for less than four
mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving
hours, the previously selected drive program is
style, but also when driving at speed on straight
activated when the engine is next started. If the
roads, e.g. motorways.
ignition is switched off for more than four hours,
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
Comfort mode is activated when the engine is
lamps ; and = go out.
next started.
Driving and parking
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Ride Control COMFORT message
Sport mode
appears in the multifunction display.
PARKTRONIC Parking Assist
Important safety notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audibly indicates the distance between your
vehicle and an object.
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
Sport mode ensures even better contact with
not a substitute for your attention to the imme-
the road. Select this mode when employing a
diate surroundings. The responsibility for safe
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country
manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
roads.
Make sure that there are no persons, animals or
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
objects in range while manoeuvring and parking.
lamp = lights up.
You have selected Sport mode.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
The AMG Ride Control SPORT message
objects above or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC
appears in the multifunction display.
does not detect such objects when they are in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You
Sport + mode
could damage the vehicle or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and objects
The very firm setting of the suspension setting in
which absorb ultrasonic sources.
Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact
with the road. Select this mode only when driv-
Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car
ing on race circuits.
wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a
pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to
If indicator lamps ; and = are off:
malfunction.
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
lamp ; lights up.
uneven terrain.
You have selected Sport + mode.
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
appears in the multifunction display.
hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures
the minimum detection range to an obstacle
In "Sport +" mode, the vehicle is lowered by
from the bumper, not the ball coupling.
10 mm compared to the normal level.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for
the rear area when you establish an electrical
connection between your vehicle and a trailer.
Driving systems199RangeParking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-matically when you:R switch on the ignitionR shift the transmission to position D, R or NR release the electric parking brakeParking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated atspeeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at and parkingRange of the sensorsGeneral notesParking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take intoaccount obstacles located:R below the detection range, e.g. persons, ani-mals or objectsR above the detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles: Approx. 60 cm (corners); Approx. 80 cm (corners)= Approx. 120 cm (centre)? Approx. 100 cm (centre)Minimum distanceCentreApprox. 20 cm: Sensors on the front bumper, left-hand sideCornersApprox. 15 cm(example)The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-Otherwise, they may not function warning displays light up and a warningClean the sensors regularly, taking care not totone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-scratch or damage them ( Y page 345).imum, the distance may no longer be shown.Z
Driving systems
199
Range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
matically when you:
R switch on the ignition
R shift the transmission to position D, R or N
R release the electric parking brake
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
Driving and parking
Range of the sensors
General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located:
R below the detection range, e.g. persons, ani-
mals or objects
R above the detection range, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
vehicles
: Approx. 60 cm (corners)
; Approx. 80 cm (corners)
= Approx. 120 cm (centre)
? Approx. 100 cm (centre)
Minimum distance
Centre
Approx. 20 cm
: Sensors on the front bumper, left-hand side
Corners
Approx. 15 cm
(example)
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush.
If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-
Otherwise, they may not function correctly.
evant warning displays light up and a warning
Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-
scratch or damage them ( Y page 345).
imum, the distance may no longer be shown.
Z
Driving systems200Warning displaysOne or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the the:R sixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-mittent warning tone for approximately twoseconds.R seventh segment onwards, you will hear aDriving and parkingwarning tone for approximately two indicates that you have now reached theminimum Parking Assist: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-PARKTRONICcle; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-cle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is located onthe dashboard above the centre air vents. Thewarning display for the rear area is located onthe roof lining in the rear warning display for each side of the vehicleis divided into five yellow and two red Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yel-: Indicator lamplow segments showing operational readiness =; To deactivate/activate Parking Assistlight selected transmission position and theIf indicator lamp : lights up, Parking Assistdirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Pilot ismine which warning display is active when thethen also is running.i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-Transmission posi- Warning displaycally activated when you turn the key to posi-tiontion 2 in the ignition area activatedR, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areasrolling backwardsactivatedPNo areas activated
Driving systems
200
Warning displays
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
cle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
R sixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-
mittent warning tone for approximately two
seconds.
R seventh segment onwards, you will hear a
Driving and parking
warning tone for approximately two seconds.
This indicates that you have now reached the
minimum distance.
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist
: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-
PARKTRONIC
cle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located on
the dashboard above the centre air vents. The
warning display for the rear area is located on
the roof lining in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yel-
: Indicator lamp
low segments showing operational readiness =
; To deactivate/activate Parking Assist
light up.
PARKTRONIC
The selected transmission position and the
If indicator lamp : lights up, Parking Assist
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Pilot is
mine which warning display is active when the
then also deactivated.
engine is running.
i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-
Transmission posi- Warning display
cally activated when you turn the key to posi-
tion
tion 2 in the ignition lock.
D
Front area activated
R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas
rolling backwards
activated
P
No areas activated
Driving systems201Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONICProblemPossible causes/consequences and M SolutionsOnly the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-the Parking warningX If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at adisplays are lit. You alsoqualified specialist a warning tone forDriving and parkingapproximately two AssistPARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately five seconds,and the indicator lamp inthe Parking AssistPARKTRONIC buttonlights the red segments inThe Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-the Parking warningX Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors ( Y page 345).displays are lit. ParkingX Switch the ignition back PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterThe problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-approximately five sec-sound .X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a differentlocation.G WARNINGParking PilotWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingGeneral notesspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveParking Pilot is an electronic parking aid withonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldultrasound. It measures the road on both sidescause you to collide with other road the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suit-There is a risk of an parking space. Active steering interventionPay attention to other road users. Stop theand brake application can assist you duringparking. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is alsovehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilotavailable ( Y page 198).parking safety notes! If you cannot avoid driving over obstacles,e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at an obtuse angleParking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a substituteonly. You could otherwise damage the wheelfor your attention to the immediate surround-rims and . The responsibility for safe manoeuvringPa
Driving systems
201
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-
the Parking Assist
vated.
PARKTRONIC warning
X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
displays are lit. You also
qualified specialist workshop.
hear a warning tone for
Driving and parking
approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately five seconds,
and the indicator lamp in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments in
The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-
the Parking Assist
ference.
PARKTRONIC warning
X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors ( Y page 345).
displays are lit. Parking
X Switch the ignition back on.
Assist PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
approximately five sec-
sound waves.
onds.
X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different
location.
G WARNING
Parking Pilot
While parking or pulling out of a parking
General notes
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides
cause you to collide with other road users.
of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suit-
There is a risk of an accident.
able parking space. Active steering intervention
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
and brake application can assist you during
parking. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is also
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot
available ( Y page 198).
parking procedure.
Important safety notes
! If you cannot avoid driving over obstacles,
e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at an obtuse angle
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a substitute
only. You could otherwise damage the wheel
for your attention to the immediate surround-
rims and tyres.
ings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring
Parking Pilot may show parking spaces which
and parking remains with you. Make sure that no
are not suitable for parking, e.g.:
persons, animals or objects are in the manoeu-
vring range.
R in a zone where parking or stopping is pro-
hibited
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva-
ted, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.
R in front of driveways or entrances and exits
R on unsuitable surfaces
Z
Driving systems202Parking tips:Further information about the detection range( Y page 199).R on narrow roads, drive as closely as possibleParking Pilot does not assist you parking inpast the parking spacespaces at a right angle to the direction of travelR parking spaces that are littered or overgrownif:might be identified or measured incorrectlyR two parking spaces are located directly nextR parking spaces that are partially occupied byto one anothertrailer drawbars might not be identified assuch or be measured incorrectlyR the parking space is directly next to a lowDriving and parkingobstacle such as a low kerbR snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccuratelyR you forward-parkR pay attention to the Parking AssistParking Pilot does not assist you parking inPARKTRONIC warning messagesspaces parallel or at a right angle to the direction( Y page 198) during the parking procedureof travel if:R you can intervene in the steering procedure toR the parking space is on a kerbcorrect it at any time. Parking Pilot will then beR the system reads the parking space as , such as by foliage or grass pavingR when transporting a load that protrudes fromblocksyour vehicle, you should not use Parking PilotR the area is too small for the vehicle toR never use Parking Pilot when snow chains aremanoeuvre intofittedR the parking space is bordered by an obstacle,R make sure that the tyre pressures are alwayse.g. a tree, a post or a trailercorrect. This has a direct influence on theparking characteristics of the vehicleUse Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:R parallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelR on straight roads, not bendsR on the same level as the road, e.g. not on thepavement: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbolDetecting parking spaces= Detected parking space on the rightObjects located above the detection range ofParking Pilot is activated automatically whenParking Pilot will not be detected when t
Driving systems
202
Parking tips:
Further information about the detection range
( Y page 199).
R on narrow roads, drive as closely as possible
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
past the parking space
spaces at a right angle to the direction of travel
R parking spaces that are littered or overgrown
if:
might be identified or measured incorrectly
R two parking spaces are located directly next
R parking spaces that are partially occupied by
to one another
trailer drawbars might not be identified as
such or be measured incorrectly
R the parking space is directly next to a low
Driving and parking
obstacle such as a low kerb
R snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately
R you forward-park
R pay attention to the Parking Assist
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
PARKTRONIC warning messages
spaces parallel or at a right angle to the direction
( Y page 198) during the parking procedure
of travel if:
R you can intervene in the steering procedure to
R the parking space is on a kerb
correct it at any time. Parking Pilot will then be
R the system reads the parking space as being
cancelled.
blocked, such as by foliage or grass paving
R when transporting a load that protrudes from
blocks
your vehicle, you should not use Parking Pilot
R the area is too small for the vehicle to
R never use Parking Pilot when snow chains are
manoeuvre into
fitted
R the parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
R make sure that the tyre pressures are always
e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
correct. This has a direct influence on the
parking characteristics of the vehicle
Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:
R parallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
R on straight roads, not bends
R on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
pavement
: Detected parking space on the left
; Parking symbol
Detecting parking spaces
= Detected parking space on the right
Objects located above the detection range of
Parking Pilot is activated automatically when
Parking Pilot will not be detected when the park-
you drive forwards. The system is operational at
ing space is measured. These are not taken into
speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While
account when the parking/exiting procedure is
in operation, the system independently locates
calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections
and measures parking spaces on both sides of
or loading ramps of goods vehicles. Parking Pilot
the vehicle.
may therefore guide you into the parking space
Parking Pilot will detect only parking spaces that
too early.
are:
G WARNING
R parallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
If there are objects above the detection range:
R parallel to the direction of travel and at least
R Parking Pilot may steer in too early
1.5 m wide
R the vehicle may not stop in front of these
R parallel to the direction of travel and at least
objects
1.0 m longer than your vehicle
R at right angles to the direction of travel and at
This could cause a collision. There is a risk of
least 1.0 m wider than your vehicle
an accident.
If objects are located above the detection
i Note that Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC cannot
measure the depth of parking spaces if they
range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot.
Driving systems203are at right angles to the direction of travel.X Stop the vehicle when the parking symbolYou will need to judge whether your vehicleshows the desired parking space on thewill fit in the parking cluster.X Shift the transmission to position driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you willThe Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:see parking symbol ; as a status indicator on% message appears on the multifunctionthe instrument cluster. When a parking been detected, an arrow towards the right orthe left also appears. Parking Pilot displays onlyX To cancel the procedure: press the %parking spaces on the front-passenger side asbutton on the multifunction steering wheel orDriving and parkingstandard. Parking spaces on the driver's sidepull displayed as soon as the turn signal on theordriver's side is activated. When parking on theX To park using Parking Pilot: press the adriver's side, you must keep this activated untilbutton on the multifunction steering confirm the use of Parking Pilot by pressingThe Parking Pilot active Acceleratethe a button on the multifunction steeringand brake Observe surroundings mes-wheel. The system automatically determinessage appears on the multifunction the parking space is parallel or at rightX Release the multifunction steering to the direction of travel.X Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake atA parking space is displayed while you are driv-all times. When reversing, drive at a speeding past it, and until you are approximately 15 mbelow approximately 10 km/h. Otherwise,away from Pilot is Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstillParkingwhen the vehicle approaches the rear borderof the parking space.G WARNINGManoeuvring may be required in tight parkingIf you leave the vehicle when it is only by Active Parking Assist it could rollThe Parking Pilot active Select Daway if:Observe surroundings message ap
Driving systems
203
are at right angles to the direction of travel.
X Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol
You will need to judge whether your vehicle
shows the desired parking space on the
will fit in the parking space.
instrument cluster.
X Shift the transmission to position R.
When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will
The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
see parking symbol ; as a status indicator on
% message appears on the multifunction
the instrument cluster. When a parking space
display.
has been detected, an arrow towards the right or
the left also appears. Parking Pilot displays only
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
parking spaces on the front-passenger side as
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
Driving and parking
standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side
pull away.
are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the
or
driver's side is activated. When parking on the
X To park using Parking Pilot: press the a
driver's side, you must keep this activated until
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
you confirm the use of Parking Pilot by pressing
The Parking Pilot active Accelerate
the a button on the multifunction steering
and brake Observe surroundings mes-
wheel. The system automatically determines
sage appears on the multifunction display.
whether the parking space is parallel or at right
X Release the multifunction steering wheel.
angles to the direction of travel.
X Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at
A parking space is displayed while you are driv-
all times. When reversing, drive at a speed
ing past it, and until you are approximately 15 m
below approximately 10 km/h. Otherwise,
away from it.
Parking Pilot is cancelled.
Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
Parking
when the vehicle approaches the rear border
of the parking space.
G WARNING
Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
spaces.
braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll
The Parking Pilot active Select D
away if:
Observe surroundings message appears on
the multifunction display.
R there is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
X Shift the transmission to position D while the
vehicle is stationary.
R the electrical system in the engine com-
Parking Pilot steers immediately in the other
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
direction.
pered with.
The Parking Pilot active Accelerate
and brake Observe surroundings mes-
R the battery is disconnected.
sage appears on the multifunction display.
R the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle
occupant.
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
There is a risk of an accident.
pulling away.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
against rolling away.
times.
Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill.
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects
The Parking Pilot active Select R
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically
Observe surroundings message appears on
whilst the vehicle is parking. You are respon-
the multifunction display.
sible for braking in good time.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete,
the Parking Pilot ended message appears
and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now
parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without
the driver having to depress the brake pedal.
Z
Driving systems204X Shift the transmission to position D or braking effect is cancelled when youThe Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:depress the accelerator pedal.% message appears on the multifunctionParking Pilot no longer supports you with interventions and brake applications. WhenParking Pilot is finished, you must steer andX To cancel the procedure: press the %brake again yourself. Parking Assistbutton on the multifunction steering wheel orPARKTRONIC is still tips:orX To exit a parking space using ParkingDriving and parkingR The way your vehicle is positioned in the park-Pilot: press the a button on the multi-ing space after parking is dependent on vari-ous factors. These include the position andfunction steering Parking Pilot active Accelerateshape of the vehicles parked in front of andand brake Observe surroundings mes-behind it and the conditions of the location. Itis possible that Parking Pilot could guide yousage appears on the multifunction far or not far enough into a parking space.X Release the multifunction steering some cases, it may also lead you across orX Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Doonto the kerb. Cancel the parking procedurenot exceed a maximum speed of approx-with Parking Pilot if 10 km/h when exiting a parkingR You can also preselect transmission positionspace. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is cancelled.D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive asX Shift the transmission to position D or R asfar into the parking space. Should the trans-required or according to the message whilemission change take place too early, the park-the vehicle is procedure is cancelled. A sensible parkingParking Pilot steers immediately in the otherposition can no longer be achieved from thisdirection. The Parking Pilot and brake Observe sur‐roundings message appears on the multi-Exiting a parking spacefunction displ
Driving systems
204
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
The braking effect is cancelled when you
The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
depress the accelerator pedal.
% message appears on the multifunction
Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steer-
display.
ing interventions and brake applications. When
Parking Pilot is finished, you must steer and
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
brake again yourself. Parking Assist
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
PARKTRONIC is still available.
pull away.
Parking tips:
or
X To exit a parking space using Parking
Driving and parking
R The way your vehicle is positioned in the park-
Pilot: press the a button on the multi-
ing space after parking is dependent on vari-
ous factors. These include the position and
function steering wheel.
The Parking Pilot active Accelerate
shape of the vehicles parked in front of and
and brake Observe surroundings mes-
behind it and the conditions of the location. It
is possible that Parking Pilot could guide you
sage appears on the multifunction display.
too far or not far enough into a parking space.
X Release the multifunction steering wheel.
In some cases, it may also lead you across or
X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
onto the kerb. Cancel the parking procedure
not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
with Parking Pilot if necessary.
imately 10 km/h when exiting a parking
R You can also preselect transmission position
space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is cancelled.
D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as
X Shift the transmission to position D or R as
far into the parking space. Should the trans-
required or according to the message while
mission change take place too early, the park-
the vehicle is stationary.
ing procedure is cancelled. A sensible parking
Parking Pilot steers immediately in the other
position can no longer be achieved from this
direction. The Parking Pilot active
position.
Accelerate and brake Observe sur‐
roundings message appears on the multi-
Exiting a parking space
function display.
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
In order for Parking Pilot to assist you:
for the steering procedure to complete before
R the border of the parking space must be high
pulling away.
enough at the front and the rear, for example,
If you reverse after activation, the steering
a kerb is too small
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
R the border of the parking space must not be
tion.
too wide, Your vehicle can be manoeuvred
X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by
into a position at a maximum of 45° to the
the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
starting position in the parking space.
plays, several times if necessary.
R a manoeuvring distance of at least 1.0 m must
Once you have exited the parking space com-
be available.
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a park-
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
ing space only if you have parked the vehicle
Parking Pilot ended message appears on
parallel to the direction of travel using Parking
the multifunction display. You will then have to
Pilot.
steer and merge into traffic on your own. Park-
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects
ing Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically
take over the steering before the vehicle has
whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space.
exited the parking space completely. This is
You are responsible for braking in good time.
useful, for example, when you recognise that it
is already possible to pull out of the parking
X Start the engine.
space.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
will drive out of the parking space.
Driving systems205Cancelling Parking Pilotvehicle with guide lines on the multimedia sys-tem.X Stop the movement of the multifunctionThe area behind the vehicle is displayed as asteering wheel or steer image, as in the rear-view Pilot is cancelled at once. The Park‐ing Pilot cancelled message appears ini The text shown on the multimedia systemthe multifunction depends on the language setting. Thefollowing are examples of reversing cameraordisplays on the multimedia system.X Press the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC buttonDriving and parking( Y page 200).Important safety notesParking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched offand Parking Pilot is immediately Parking Pilot cancelled messageThe reversing camera is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attention to the immediateappears in the multifunction . The responsibility for safeParking Pilot is cancelled automatically when:manoeuvring and parking remains with sure that there are no persons, animals orR the electric parking brake is appliedobjects in the manoeuvring area while manoeu-R transmission position P is selectedvring and parking in parking spaces.R parking using Parking Pilot is no longer pos-The reversing camera will not function or willsiblefunction only in a limited manner:R you are driving faster than 10 km/hR if the boot lid is openR a wheel spins and ESP ® intervenes or fails.R if there is heavy rain, snow or fogThe ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instru-R at night or in very dark placesment clusterR if the camera is exposed to very bright lightA warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-appears and the multifunction display shows theR if the area is lit by fluorescent lamps or LEDParking Pilot cancelled (the display may flicker)When Parking Pilot is cancelled, you must steerR if there is a sudden change in temperature,and brake again yourself.e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-terIf a syste
Driving systems
205
Cancelling Parking Pilot
vehicle with guide lines on the multimedia sys-
tem.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
steering wheel or steer yourself.
mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror.
Parking Pilot is cancelled at once. The Park‐
ing Pilot cancelled message appears in
i The text shown on the multimedia system
the multifunction display.
display depends on the language setting. The
following are examples of reversing camera
or
displays on the multimedia system.
X Press the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button
Driving and parking
( Y page 200).
Important safety notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off
and Parking Pilot is immediately cancelled.
The Parking Pilot cancelled message
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the immediate
appears in the multifunction display.
surroundings. The responsibility for safe
Parking Pilot is cancelled automatically when:
manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
Make sure that there are no persons, animals or
R the electric parking brake is applied
objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeu-
R transmission position P is selected
vring and parking in parking spaces.
R parking using Parking Pilot is no longer pos-
The reversing camera will not function or will
sible
function only in a limited manner:
R you are driving faster than 10 km/h
R if the boot lid is open
R a wheel spins and ESP ® intervenes or fails.
R if there is heavy rain, snow or fog
The ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instru-
R at night or in very dark places
ment cluster
R if the camera is exposed to very bright light
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-
appears and the multifunction display shows the
R if the area is lit by fluorescent lamps or LED
Parking Pilot cancelled message.
lighting (the display may flicker)
When Parking Pilot is cancelled, you must steer
R if there is a sudden change in temperature,
and brake again yourself.
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
ter
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
R if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
accelerator pedal again.
Observe the notes on cleaning
( Y page 346)
R if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
Reversing camera
case, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
General notes
The field of vision and other functions of the
reversing camera may be restricted due to addi-
tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
licence plate holder, bicycle rack).
For technical reasons, leaving the standard
height can result in inaccuracies in the guide
lines on vehicles with a height-adjustable chas-
sis.
i The reversing camera is protected from rain-
drops and dust by a flap. When the reversing
camera is activated, this flap opens.
The flap closes again when:
R you have finished the manoeuvring process
Reversing camera : is a visual parking and
R you switch off the engine
manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind your
R you open the luggage compartment
Z
Driving systems206Observe the notes on cleaning ( Y page 346).! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:For technical reasons, the flap may remainopen briefly after the reversing camera hasR the bumper of a parked vehiclebeen deactivated.R the drawbar of a trailerR the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchActivating/deactivating the reversingR the rear section of an HGVcameraR a slanted postUse the guidelines only for and parkingApproach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.X To activate: make sure that the key is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected on the multimedia system: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-(see the Digital Owner's Manual).imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicleX Engage reverse gear.; White guide line without turning the steeringThe reversing camera flap opens. The multi-wheel, vehicle width including the exteriormedia system shows the area behind the vehi-mirrors (static)cle with guide lines.= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthThe image from the reversing camera is avail-including the exterior mirrors, for currentable throughout the manoeuvring wheel angle (dynamic)? Yellow lanes marking the course the tyresX To switch the function mode for vehicleswill take for current steering input (dynamic)with trailer tow hitch: using the controller,select symbol : for the "Reverse parking"function or symbol ; for "Coupling up atrailer".The symbol of the selected function is deactivate: the reversing camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission to j or afterdriving forwards a short on the multimedia systemThe reversing camera may show a distorted viewA Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicleObstacles are not shown by the reversing cam-era in the following loca
Driving systems
206
Observe the notes on cleaning ( Y page 346).
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the reversing camera has
R the bumper of a parked vehicle
been deactivated.
R the drawbar of a trailer
R the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Activating/deactivating the reversing
R the rear section of an HGV
camera
R a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Driving and parking
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
X To activate: make sure that the key is in
position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
function is selected on the multimedia system
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
(see the Digital Owner's Manual).
imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
X Engage reverse gear.
; White guide line without turning the steering
The reversing camera flap opens. The multi-
wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
media system shows the area behind the vehi-
mirrors (static)
cle with guide lines.
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
The image from the reversing camera is avail-
including the exterior mirrors, for current
able throughout the manoeuvring process.
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
? Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres
X To switch the function mode for vehicles
will take for current steering input (dynamic)
with trailer tow hitch: using the controller,
select symbol : for the "Reverse parking"
function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a
trailer".
The symbol of the selected function is high-
lighted.
To deactivate: the reversing camera deacti-
vates if you shift the transmission to j or after
driving forwards a short distance.
Displays on the multimedia system
The reversing camera may show a distorted view
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
Obstacles are not shown by the reversing cam-
era in the following locations:
B Vehicle centre axis (locating aid)
C Bumper
R very close to the rear bumper
D Red guide line at a distance of approximately
R under the rear bumper
0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
R in the area immediately above the recessed
tailgate handle
Driving systems207"Reverse parking" functionThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position k .Reversing straight into a parking spaceThe distance specifications apply only towithout steering inputobjects that are at ground and parking: Front warning displays: White guide line without steering input, vehi-; Additional measurement operational readi-cle width including the exterior mirrorsness indicator for Parking Assist(static)PARKTRONIC; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width= Rear warning displaysincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC:= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicletional ( Y page 199), additional measurement? Red guide line at a distance of approximatelyoperational readiness indicator ; appears on0.30 m from the rear of the vehiclethe multimedia system. If the Parking AssistPARKTRONIC warning displays are active orX Make sure that the reversing camera islight up, warning displays : and = are alsoswitched on ( Y page 206).active or light up correspondingly on the multi-The lane and the guide lines are system.X With the help of white guide line :, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefullyreverse until you reach the end guide line ? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost parallelin the parking space.Z
Driving systems
207
"Reverse parking" function
The guide lines are shown when the transmis-
sion is in position k .
Reversing straight into a parking space
The distance specifications apply only to
without steering input
objects that are at ground level.
Driving and parking
: Front warning displays
: White guide line without steering input, vehi-
; Additional measurement operational readi-
cle width including the exterior mirrors
ness indicator for Parking Assist
(static)
PARKTRONIC
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
= Rear warning displays
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC:
= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
tional ( Y page 199), additional measurement
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
operational readiness indicator ; appears on
0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
the multimedia system. If the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or
X Make sure that the reversing camera is
light up, warning displays : and = are also
switched on ( Y page 206).
active or light up correspondingly on the multi-
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
media system.
X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
reverse until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
Z
Driving systems208Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-ing inputDriving and parking: White guide line at current steering angle; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the centre position: Parking space markingwhile the vehicle is stationary.; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.X Make sure that the reversing camera isswitched on ( Y page 206).The lane and the guide lines are shown.X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steer-ing wheel in the direction of the parking spaceuntil yellow guide line ; reaches parkingspace marking :.X Maintain the steering input and reverse care-: Red guide line at a distance of approximatelyfully.0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle; White guide line without steering angle= End of parking spaceX Reverse carefully until you have reached theend guide line : is then at the end of parkingspace =. The vehicle is almost parallel in theparking space.: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking white lane should be as close as possibleto parallel with the parking space marking.
Driving systems
208
Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-
ing input
Driving and parking
: White guide line at current steering angle
; Parking space marking
X Turn the steering wheel to the centre position
: Parking space marking
while the vehicle is stationary.
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the reversing camera is
switched on ( Y page 206).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steer-
ing wheel in the direction of the parking space
until yellow guide line ; reaches parking
space marking :.
X Maintain the steering input and reverse care-
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately
fully.
0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
; White guide line without steering angle
= End of parking space
X Reverse carefully until you have reached the
end position.
Red guide line : is then at the end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.
: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close as possible
to parallel with the parking space marking.
Driving systems209"Coupling up a trailer" functiononly to objects that are at the same level asthe ball coupling.X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailerdrawbar locating aid ; points approximatelyin the direction of trailer drawbar =.X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar = rea-ches the red guide distance between the trailer drawbar andthe red guide line is now approximatelyDriving and parking0.30 m.X Couple up the trailer ( Y page 232).180° view: Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide lineat a distance of approximately 1.0 m fromthe rear of the vehicle; Trailer drawbarThis function is available only on vehicles with atrailer tow hitch.X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height oftrailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higherthan the ball coupling.X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailerdrawbar ;.: Symbol for the 180° view function; Own vehicle= Warning displays for Parking AssistPARKTRONICYou can also use the reversing camera to selecta 180° Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-tional ( Y page 199), a symbol for your own vehi-cle appears on the multimedia system. If theParking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displaysare active, warning displays = light up on the: Red guide line at a distance of approximatelymultimedia system in yellow or red accordingly.0.30 m from the ball coupling; Trailer drawbar locating aid360° camera= Trailer drawbar? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func-General notestionA Ball couplingThe 360° camera is a camera system compris-ing four cameras.i For technical reasons, the ball coupling ofthe trailer tow hitch on the multimedia systemThe system evaluates images from the followingdisplay is either only partially visible or not atcameras:all.R reversing cameraX Select symbol ? using the controller.R front cameraThe "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-R two cameras in the exterior mirrorsted. The distance specifications now applyZ
Driving systems
209
"Coupling up a trailer" function
only to objects that are at the same level as
the ball coupling.
X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer
drawbar locating aid ; points approximately
in the direction of trailer drawbar =.
X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar = rea-
ches the red guide line.
The distance between the trailer drawbar and
the red guide line is now approximately
Driving and parking
0.30 m.
X Couple up the trailer ( Y page 232).
180° view
: Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide line
at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from
the rear of the vehicle
; Trailer drawbar
This function is available only on vehicles with a
trailer tow hitch.
X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of
trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher
than the ball coupling.
X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer
drawbar ;.
: Symbol for the 180° view function
; Own vehicle
= Warning displays for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
You can also use the reversing camera to select
a 180° view.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
tional ( Y page 199), a symbol for your own vehi-
cle appears on the multimedia system. If the
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays
are active, warning displays = light up on the
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately
multimedia system in yellow or red accordingly.
0.30 m from the ball coupling
; Trailer drawbar locating aid
360° camera
= Trailer drawbar
? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func-
General notes
tion
A Ball coupling
The 360° camera is a camera system compris-
ing four cameras.
i For technical reasons, the ball coupling of
the trailer tow hitch on the multimedia system
The system evaluates images from the following
display is either only partially visible or not at
cameras:
all.
R reversing camera
X Select symbol ? using the controller.
R front camera
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-
R two cameras in the exterior mirrors
ted. The distance specifications now apply
Z
Driving systems210The cameras cover the immediate surroundingsThe flap is closed again in the following situa-of the vehicle. The 360° camera assists you, fortions:instance when parking or at exits with reducedR you have finished the manoeuvring processvisibility.R you switch off the engineYou can show pictures from the 360° camera inR you open the luggage compartmentfull-screen mode or in seven different split-Observe the notes on cleaning ( Y page 346).screen views on the multimedia system display.A split-screen view also includes a top view ofFor technical reasons, the flap may remainthe vehicle. This view is calculated from the dataopen briefly after the camera has been deac-Driving and parkingsupplied by the installed cameras (virtual ).The seven split-screen views are:Important safety notesR top view and image from the reversing cam-The 360° camera is only an aid and may show aera (130° viewing angle)distorted view of obstacles, show them incor-R top view and image from the front camerarectly or not show them at all. The 360° camera(130° viewing angle without displaying theis not a substitute for attentive steering wheel angle)The responsibility for safe manoeuvring andR top view and enlarged rear viewparking remains with you. Make sure that thereR top view and enlarged front vieware no persons, animals or objects in theR top view and trailer view (vehicles with trailermanoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park-tow hitch)ing in parking spaces.R top view and rear-view images from the exte-You are responsible for safety at all times andrior mirror cameras (rear wheel view)must always pay attention to your immediatesurroundings when parking and manoeuvring.R top view and forward-view images from theThis applies to the areas behind, in front of andexterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endan-i The top view and trailer view are availableger yourself and vehicles equipped with a tr
Driving systems
210
The cameras cover the immediate surroundings
The flap is closed again in the following situa-
of the vehicle. The 360° camera assists you, for
tions:
instance when parking or at exits with reduced
R you have finished the manoeuvring process
visibility.
R you switch off the engine
You can show pictures from the 360° camera in
R you open the luggage compartment
full-screen mode or in seven different split-
Observe the notes on cleaning ( Y page 346).
screen views on the multimedia system display.
A split-screen view also includes a top view of
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data
open briefly after the camera has been deac-
Driving and parking
supplied by the installed cameras (virtual cam-
tivated.
era).
The seven split-screen views are:
Important safety notes
R top view and image from the reversing cam-
The 360° camera is only an aid and may show a
era (130° viewing angle)
distorted view of obstacles, show them incor-
R top view and image from the front camera
rectly or not show them at all. The 360° camera
(130° viewing angle without displaying the
is not a substitute for attentive driving.
maximum steering wheel angle)
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
R top view and enlarged rear view
parking remains with you. Make sure that there
R top view and enlarged front view
are no persons, animals or objects in the
R top view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer
manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park-
tow hitch)
ing in parking spaces.
R top view and rear-view images from the exte-
You are responsible for safety at all times and
rior mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
must always pay attention to your immediate
surroundings when parking and manoeuvring.
R top view and forward-view images from the
This applies to the areas behind, in front of and
exterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)
beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endan-
i The top view and trailer view are available
ger yourself and others.
for vehicles equipped with a trailer tow hitch.
The 360° camera will not function or will func-
When the function is active and you shift the
tion only to a limited extent:
transmission from h or k to i, the dynamic
R if the doors are open
guide lines are hidden.
R if the exterior mirrors are folded in
When you shift between transmission positions
R the tailgate is open
h and k, you see the previously selected front
R in heavy rain, snow or fog
or rear view.
R at night or in very dark places
Distances measured by Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC will also be displayed:
R if the cameras are exposed to very bright light
R if the area is lit by fluorescent lamps or LED
R as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle
lighting (the display may flicker)
symbol in top view in split-screen mode or
R if there is a sudden change in temperature,
R at the bottom right as red or yellow brackets
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode
ter
The line thickness and colour of the brackets
R if the camera lenses are dirty or covered
show how far the vehicle is from an object:
R if the vehicle components in which the cam-
R yellow brackets with thin lines: Parking Assist
eras are fitted are damaged. In this event,
PARKTRONIC is active
have the camera position and setting checked
R yellow brackets with normal lines: an object is
at a qualified specialist workshop.
present in close range of the vehicle
Do not use the 360° camera under such cir-
R red line: an object is present in the immediate
cumstances. You could otherwise injure others
close range of the vehicle
or damage objects when parking the vehicle.
i The camera in the rear area is protected
Guide lines are always shown at road level. In
from raindrops and dust by means of a flap.
trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the
When the camera is activated, this flap opens.
level of the trailer coupling.
Driving systems211The field of vision and other functions of theX Ensure that the key is in key position 2 in thecamera system may be restricted due to addi-ignition lock.X Make sure that the Activation by R geartional accessories on the rear of the vehicle ( plate holder, bicycle rack).function is selected on the multimedia systemOn vehicles with height-adjustable suspension,(see the Digital Owner's Manual).due to the technical conditions, leaving theX To show the 360° camera image: engagestandard height can result in the following:reverse multimedia system shows the areaR inaccuracies in the guide linesbehind the vehicle in split-screen mode. YouR inaccuracies in the display of generatedDriving and parkingsee the top view of the vehicle and the imageimages (top view)from the reversing conditionsSelecting the split-screens or 180° viewThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:Selecting split-screen viewR your vehicle is equipped with a 360° cameraX To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:R the key is in key position 2 in the ignitionslide 5 the To select one of the vehicle icons: turn 3R the multimedia system is activatedthe controller.X To switch to 180° view : turn 3 the con-Switching on the 360° cameratroller to select 180° view and press 7 toX Press the Ø button in the centre longer than two seconds.i The 180° view option is only available in theThe following appears depending on whethertransmission position h or k is selected:following views:R a split screen with top view and the imageR top view with image from the reversingfrom the front camera orcameraR a split screen with top view and the imageR top view with image from the front camerafrom the reversing cameraorDisplays on the multimedia systemX Press the Ø button in the centre vehicle menu safety notesX Select 360° camera and press 7 to camera system may show a distorted viewThe followi
Driving systems
211
The field of vision and other functions of the
X Ensure that the key is in key position 2 in the
camera system may be restricted due to addi-
ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
licence plate holder, bicycle rack).
function is selected on the multimedia system
On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension,
(see the Digital Owner's Manual).
due to the technical conditions, leaving the
X To show the 360° camera image: engage
standard height can result in the following:
reverse gear.
The multimedia system shows the area
R inaccuracies in the guide lines
behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You
R inaccuracies in the display of generated
Driving and parking
see the top view of the vehicle and the image
images (top view)
from the reversing camera.
Activation conditions
Selecting the split-screens or 180° view
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
Selecting split-screen view
R your vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
R the key is in key position 2 in the ignition
slide 5 the controller.
lock
X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn 3
R the multimedia system is activated
the controller.
X To switch to 180° view : turn 3 the con-
Switching on the 360° camera
troller to select 180° view and press 7 to
X Press the Ø button in the centre console
confirm.
for longer than two seconds.
i The 180° view option is only available in the
The following appears depending on whether
transmission position h or k is selected:
following views:
R a split screen with top view and the image
R top view with image from the reversing
from the front camera or
camera
R a split screen with top view and the image
R top view with image from the front camera
from the reversing camera
or
Displays on the multimedia system
X Press the Ø button in the centre console.
The vehicle menu appears.
Important safety notes
X Select 360° camera and press 7 to confirm.
The camera system may show a distorted view
The following appears depending on whether
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show
transmission position h or k is selected:
them at all. Obstacles in the following locations
R a split screen with top view and the image
are not shown by the system:
from the front camera or
R under the front and rear bumpers
R a split screen with top view and the image
R very close to the front and rear bumpers
from the reversing camera
R in the area immediately above the recessed
tailgate handle
Switching on the 360° camera using
R very close to the exterior mirrors
reverse gear
R in the transitional areas between the various
cameras in the virtual top view
You can show images from the 360° camera
automatically by engaging reverse gear.
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R the bumper of a parked vehicle
R the drawbar of a trailer
R the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Z
Driving systems212Top view with image from the front cam-R the rear section of an HGVeraR a slanted postUse the guidelines only for objects no further than the bottom-most view with image from the reversingcameraDriving and parking: Symbol for the split-screen setting with topview and front camera image; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 4.0 m from the front of the vehicle= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for current: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-steering wheel angle (dynamic)imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle? Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres; Symbol for the split-screen setting with topwill take for current steering input (dynamic)view and reversing camera imageA Red guide line at a distance of approximately= Guide line for the maximum steering angle0.30 m from the front of the vehicle? Yellow lanes marking the course the tyresB Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-will take for current steering input (dynamic)imately 1.0 m from the front of the vehicleA Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthTop view and enlarged rear viewincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic): Symbol for the split-screen setting with topview and reversing camera image enlargedB Vehicle centre axis (locating aid); Red guide line at a distance of approximatelyC Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-0.30 m from the rear of the vehicleimately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicleD BumperThis view assists you in estimating the distanceE Red guide line at a distance of approximatelyto the vehicle behind you.0.30 m from the rear of the vehiclei This setting can also be selected as anThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-enlarged front is in position k .The distance specifications apply only toobjects that are at ground level.
Driving systems
212
Top view with image from the front cam-
R the rear section of an HGV
era
R a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
Top view with image from the reversing
camera
Driving and parking
: Symbol for the split-screen setting with top
view and front camera image
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 4.0 m from the front of the vehicle
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
? Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres
; Symbol for the split-screen setting with top
will take for current steering input (dynamic)
view and reversing camera image
A Red guide line at a distance of approximately
= Guide line for the maximum steering angle
0.30 m from the front of the vehicle
? Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres
B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
will take for current steering input (dynamic)
imately 1.0 m from the front of the vehicle
A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
Top view and enlarged rear view
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
: Symbol for the split-screen setting with top
view and reversing camera image enlarged
B Vehicle centre axis (locating aid)
; Red guide line at a distance of approximately
C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
D Bumper
This view assists you in estimating the distance
E Red guide line at a distance of approximately
to the vehicle behind you.
0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
i This setting can also be selected as an
The guide lines are shown when the transmis-
enlarged front view.
sion is in position k .
The distance specifications apply only to
objects that are at ground level.
Driving systems213Top view with image from the camera in180° viewthe exterior mirrorsDriving and parking: Symbol for the full-screen setting with the: Symbol for setting the top view with imagereversing camera imagefrom the forward camera in the exterior mir-; Own vehiclerors= Warning displays for Parking Assist; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthPARKTRONICincluding the exterior mirror (right side ofi 180° view can also be selected as frontvehicle)view.= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirror (left side ofSelect this view when you are driving out of anvehicle)exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,for example.i You can also select the camera setting in theexterior mirrors for the rear-facing the 360° camera displayTop view with trailer viewThe 360° camera display is stopped:R when you select transmission position j orR when you are driving at moderate speedsThe previous display appears on the multimediasystem. You can also switch the display byselecting the & symbol in the display andpressing the controller to ASSISTGeneral notes: Symbol for the trailer view settingATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,; Trailer drawbar locating aidmonotonous journeys such as on motorways= Ball couplingand trunk roads. It is active in the 60 km/h to? Red guide line at a distance of approximately200 km/h speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST0.30 m from the ball couplingdetects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-ing lapses in concentration on the part of theThe lines are shown at the level of the trailerdriver, it suggests taking a .i For technical reasons, the ball coupling ofImportant safety notesthe trailer tow hitch is only partially visible onthe multimedia system ASSIST is only an aid. It may notalways detect fatigue or lapses in concentrationuntil too late, or may not detect them at all. TheZ
Driving systems
213
Top view with image from the camera in
180° view
the exterior mirrors
Driving and parking
: Symbol for the full-screen setting with the
: Symbol for setting the top view with image
reversing camera image
from the forward camera in the exterior mir-
; Own vehicle
rors
= Warning displays for Parking Assist
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
PARKTRONIC
including the exterior mirror (right side of
i 180° view can also be selected as front
vehicle)
view.
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirror (left side of
Select this view when you are driving out of an
vehicle)
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
for example.
i You can also select the camera setting in the
exterior mirrors for the rear-facing view.
Stopping the 360° camera display
Top view with trailer view
The 360° camera display is stopped:
R when you select transmission position j or
R when you are driving at moderate speeds
The previous display appears on the multimedia
system. You can also switch the display by
selecting the & symbol in the display and
pressing the controller to confirm.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
: Symbol for the trailer view setting
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
; Trailer drawbar locating aid
monotonous journeys such as on motorways
= Ball coupling
and trunk roads. It is active in the 60 km/h to
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
200 km/h speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
0.30 m from the ball coupling
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the
The lines are shown at the level of the trailer
driver, it suggests taking a break.
coupling.
i For technical reasons, the ball coupling of
Important safety notes
the trailer tow hitch is only partially visible on
the multimedia system display.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It may not
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration
until too late, or may not detect them at all. The
Z
Driving systems214system is not a substitute for a well-rested andThe following information is displayed:attentive driver.R The length of the journey since the last breakThe functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isR The attention level determined by ATTENTIONrestricted, and warnings may be delayed or notASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levelsoccur at all:from high to lowR the length of the journey is less than approx-R If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculateimately 30 minutesthe attention level and cannot output a warn-ing, the System suspended messageR if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surfaceDriving and parkingis uneven or contains potholesappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speed belowR in the event of strong crosswinds60 km/h or above 200 km/h.R if you have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-Activating ATTENTION ASSISTerationR if you are predominantly driving at a speedX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-below 60 km/h or above 200 km/hboard computer ( Y page 250).R if you are driving with the Steering Pilot ofThe system determines the attention level ofDistance Pilot DISTRONIC activatedthe driver depending on the setting selected:R if the time has been set incorrectlyStandard selected: the sensitivity with whichR in active driving situations, such as when youthe system determines the attention level is setchange lanes or change your speedto evaluation of your attention level is deletedSensitive selected: the sensitivity is set restarted when continuing the journey, if:The attention level detected by ATTENTIONASSIST is adapted accordingly and the driver isR you switch off the enginewarned earlier.R you take off your seat belt and open the driv-When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theer's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or toÀ symbol and OFF appear on the multifunc-take a breaktion display in the assistance graphics displaywhen t
Driving systems
214
system is not a substitute for a well-rested and
The following information is displayed:
attentive driver.
R The length of the journey since the last break
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not
ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels
occur at all:
from high to low
R the length of the journey is less than approx-
R If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
imately 30 minutes
the attention level and cannot output a warn-
ing, the System suspended message
R if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
Driving and parking
is uneven or contains potholes
appears. The bar display then changes the
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below
R in the event of strong crosswinds
60 km/h or above 200 km/h.
R if you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
eration
R if you are predominantly driving at a speed
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h
board computer ( Y page 250).
R if you are driving with the Steering Pilot of
The system determines the attention level of
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated
the driver depending on the setting selected:
R if the time has been set incorrectly
Standard selected: the sensitivity with which
R in active driving situations, such as when you
the system determines the attention level is set
change lanes or change your speed
to normal.
The evaluation of your attention level is deleted
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher.
and restarted when continuing the journey, if:
The attention level detected by ATTENTION
ASSIST is adapted accordingly and the driver is
R you switch off the engine
warned earlier.
R you take off your seat belt and open the driv-
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to
À symbol and OFF appear on the multifunc-
take a break
tion display in the assistance graphics display
when the engine is running.
Displaying the attention level
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,
it is automatically reactivated after the engine
has been switched off. The sensitivity selected
corresponds to the last selection activated
(standard/sensitive).
Warning on the multifunction display
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears on the multi-
function display: Attention Assist: Take a
break!
In addition to the message shown on the multi-
function display, you will then hear a warning
You can have current status information dis-
tone.
played in the assistance menu ( Y page 249) of
the on-board computer.
X If necessary, take a break.
X Confirm the message by pressing the a
X Select the assistant display for ATTENTION
button on the steering wheel.
ASSIST using the on-board computer
( Y page 249).
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not take
a break, you will be warned again after
15 minutes at the earliest. This will happen only
if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indi-
Driving systems215cators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concen-The camera also detects traffic signs with indicated by an additional sign (e.g. inwet conditions).Vehicles with COMAND Online: if a warning isoutput on the multifunction display, a serviceThe traffic signs are only displayed with thestation search is performed in COMAND if:You can select a service station and you will thenR the regulation must be observed with thebe navigated to this service station. This func-restriction, ortion can be activated or deactivated in COMANDR Traffic Sign Assist is unable to the restriction appliesDriving and parkingIf Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine amaximum permitted speed from any of the avail-Traffic Sign Assistable sources, no speed limit is displayed in theinstrument cluster notesTraffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-tries. In this case, symbol : is shown in theassistance graphic display ( Y page 249).Important safety notesTraffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speedTraffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not alwayspermitted and overtaking restrictions to theable to correctly display speed limits and over-driver in the instrument cluster. Driving onto ataking restrictions. Traffic signs always have pri-section of road in the wrong direction triggers aority over the Traffic Sign Assist . Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signswith camera system : attached behind the topThe system may be either functionally impairedof the windscreen. The data and general trafficor temporarily unavailable in the following sit-regulations stored in the navigation system areuations:also used to determine the current speed limit.R visibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog orIf a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle isspraypassed, the display of the speed limits and over-R glare, e.g. from the sun being low in the skytaking restrictions is updated.R dir
Driving systems
215
cators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concen-
The camera also detects traffic signs with a
tration.
restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in
wet conditions).
Vehicles with COMAND Online: if a warning is
output on the multifunction display, a service
The traffic signs are only displayed with the
station search is performed in COMAND Online.
restriction if:
You can select a service station and you will then
R the regulation must be observed with the
be navigated to this service station. This func-
restriction, or
tion can be activated or deactivated in COMAND
R Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
Online.
whether the restriction applies
Driving and parking
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
maximum permitted speed from any of the avail-
Traffic Sign Assist
able sources, no speed limit is displayed in the
instrument cluster either.
General notes
Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-
tries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the
assistance graphic display ( Y page 249).
Important safety notes
Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always
permitted and overtaking restrictions to the
able to correctly display speed limits and over-
driver in the instrument cluster. Driving onto a
taking restrictions. Traffic signs always have pri-
section of road in the wrong direction triggers a
ority over the Traffic Sign Assist display.
warning. Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs
with camera system : attached behind the top
The system may be either functionally impaired
of the windscreen. The data and general traffic
or temporarily unavailable in the following sit-
regulations stored in the navigation system are
uations:
also used to determine the current speed limit.
R visibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or
If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is
spray
passed, the display of the speed limits and over-
R glare, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky
taking restrictions is updated.
R dirt, ice or misting on the windscreen in the
The display can also be updated without a visible
vicinity of the camera
traffic sign in the following situations:
R traffic signs are hard to detect (dirt, ice, snow)
R the vehicle changes roads (e.g. motorway exit
R the traffic signs are insufficiently lit at night
or slip road)
R signs are ambiguous (e.g. traffic signs on con-
R a village or town boundary that is stored in the
struction sites or in adjacent lanes)
digital map is passed
R the information in the digital street map of the
R the last traffic sign detected by the camera
navigation system is incorrect or out of date
has not been repeated
If a sign indicating the end of a restriction (speed
Switching the message function on/off
limit or overtaking restriction) is passed, the
sign is displayed for five seconds. The currently
If you have activated the Traffic Sign Assist dis-
applicable traffic regulation continues to be
play in the on-board computer, the traffic regu-
shown in the assistance graphic display.
lations (speed limits and overtaking restrictions)
are displayed in the instrument cluster for five
Z
Driving systems216seconds in each case. The wrong-way warninghear a warning tone. You should immediatelyand the traffic sign display for speed limits andcheck your direction of travel in order to avoidovertaking restrictions remain active even whendanger to yourself and other road display has been deactivated.i This function is not available in all countries.X Switch on the Traffic Sign Assist messagefunction via the on-board computer( Y page 250).Lane Tracking packageInstrument cluster displayGeneral notesDriving and parkingThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindShowing the assistance graphicSpot Assist ( Y page 216) and Lane KeepingX Call up the assistance graphic function usingAssist ( Y page 218).the on-board computer ( Y page 249).X Select the Traffic Sign Assist Spot AssistDetected traffic signs are displayed in theinstrument notesSpeed limit with unknown restrictionBlind Spot Assist monitors the areas on eitherside of the vehicle that are not visible to thedriver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrorsdraws your attention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on the cor-responding turn signal to change lanes, you willalso receive a visual and audible Spot Assist supports you from a speed ofapproximately 30 km/ safety notesG WARNING: Maximum permissible speedBlind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles:; Maximum permissible speed for vehicles forR overtaken too closely on the side, placingwhich the restriction in the additional sign isthem in the blind spot arearelevantR when the difference in the speed of= Additional sign for unknown restrictionapproach and overtaking is too greatA maximum permissible speed of 80 km/hAs a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn(80 mph) and a speed limit of 60 km/h (60 mph)with an unknown restriction in these situations. There is a risk of entry (wrong-way warnin
Driving systems
216
seconds in each case. The wrong-way warning
hear a warning tone. You should immediately
and the traffic sign display for speed limits and
check your direction of travel in order to avoid
overtaking restrictions remain active even when
danger to yourself and other road users.
the display has been deactivated.
i This function is not available in all countries.
X Switch on the Traffic Sign Assist message
function via the on-board computer
( Y page 250).
Lane Tracking package
Instrument cluster display
General notes
Driving and parking
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Showing the assistance graphic
Spot Assist ( Y page 216) and Lane Keeping
X Call up the assistance graphic function using
Assist ( Y page 218).
the on-board computer ( Y page 249).
X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.
Blind Spot Assist
Detected traffic signs are displayed in the
instrument cluster.
General notes
Speed limit with unknown restriction
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors
draws your attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-
responding turn signal to change lanes, you will
also receive a visual and audible warning.
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
approximately 30 km/h.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
: Maximum permissible speed
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles:
; Maximum permissible speed for vehicles for
R overtaken too closely on the side, placing
which the restriction in the additional sign is
them in the blind spot area
relevant
R when the difference in the speed of
= Additional sign for unknown restriction
approach and overtaking is too great
A maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h
As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn
(80 mph) and a speed limit of 60 km/h (60 mph)
with an unknown restriction apply.
drivers in these situations. There is a risk of an
accident.
No entry (wrong-way warning)
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and maintain a safe distance at the side
of the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is not a substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
Warning message : is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster if Traffic Sign Assist detects that
you are passing a "no entry" sign and you are
driving in the wrong direction. You will then also
Driving systems217Radar sensorsDue to the nature of the system:The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-R warnings may be issued in error when drivinggrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that theclose to crash barriers or similar solid boun-bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. Thedariessensors must not be covered, e.g. by cycle racksR warnings may be interrupted when drivingor overhanging loads. Following a severe impactalongside long vehicles, e.g. lorries, for a pro-or in the event of damage to the bumpers, havelonged timethe function of the radar sensors checked at aWarning lampqualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot AssistDriving and parkingmay no longer work properly in such Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the moni-Monitoring rangetoring range are then not particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired in the following situations:R dirt on the sensors or obscured sensorsR poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,snow or sprayR narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicyclesR very wide lanesR narrow lanesR vehicles not driving in the middle of their laneR crash barriers or other road boundariesVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.: Warning lampIf Blind Spot Assist is activated, warning lamp :in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to aspeed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h,the warning lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assistis a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above30 km/h, warning lamp : on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning alwaysoccurs when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the you overtake a vehicle, the warning onlyoccurs if the difference in speed is less than12 km/ you select reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist isnot brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-At a
Driving systems
217
Radar sensors
Due to the nature of the system:
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-
R warnings may be issued in error when driving
grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the
close to crash barriers or similar solid boun-
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The
daries
sensors must not be covered, e.g. by cycle racks
R warnings may be interrupted when driving
or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact
alongside long vehicles, e.g. lorries, for a pro-
or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have
longed time
the function of the radar sensors checked at a
Warning lamp
qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist
Driving and parking
may no longer work properly in such cases.
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the moni-
Monitoring range
toring range are then not indicated.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired in the following situations:
R dirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
R poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
snow or spray
R narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles
R very wide lanes
R narrow lanes
R vehicles not driving in the middle of their lane
R crash barriers or other road boundaries
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
: Warning lamp
If Blind Spot Assist is activated, warning lamp :
in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a
speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h,
the warning lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist
is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
30 km/h, warning lamp : on the correspond-
ing side lights up red. This warning always
occurs when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
12 km/h.
If you select reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist is
not operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
At a distance of around 0.5 m ; from the vehi-
roundings.
cle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to
Collision warning
3.0 m next to = and behind : your vehicle, as
shown in the picture.
If a vehicle is detected in the blind spot moni-
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
toring range and you switch on the correspond-
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
ing turn signal, a double warning tone sounds.
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by
case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side
the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are
of their lane.
no further warning tones.
Z
Driving systems218Activating Blind Spot AssistA warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lane marking. It will warn you by means ofX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activatedintermittent vibration through the steeringin the on-board computer ( Y page 250).wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.X Turn the key to key position 2 in the safety notesWarning lamps : in the exterior mirrors lightG WARNINGup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn Keeping Assist cannot always clearlyDriving and parkingdetect lane a trailerIn such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:If you couple up a trailer, make sure that youhave correctly established the electrical con-R issue an unnecessary warningnection. This can be accomplished by checkingR not issue a warningthe trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is thenThere is a risk of an . The warning lamp in the exteriormirrors lights up yellow and the Blind SpotAlways pay particular attention to the trafficAssist not available when towing asituation and keep within the lane, especiallytrailer See Owner's Manual messageif Lane Keeping Assist alerts in the multifunction display.G WARNINGi You can deactivate the warning lamp in theexterior Lane Keeping Assist warning does notTo do so, you will need to deactivate Blindreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isSpot Assist if:a risk of an accident.R the key is in key position 2 in the ignitionAlways steer, apply the brakes or acceleratelockthe vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keep-R the engine is not runninging Assist alerts Keeping AssistIf you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-General notesdent nor override the laws of physics. LaneKeeping Assist cannot take into account road,weather or traffic conditions. Lane KeepingAssist is only an aid. You are responsible for thedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, f
Driving systems
218
Activating Blind Spot Assist
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated
intermittent vibration through the steering
in the on-board computer ( Y page 250).
wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
X Turn the key to key position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Important safety notes
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
G WARNING
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
Driving and parking
detect lane markings.
Towing a trailer
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you
have correctly established the electrical con-
R issue an unnecessary warning
nection. This can be accomplished by checking
R not issue a warning
the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then
There is a risk of an accident.
deactivated. The warning lamp in the exterior
mirrors lights up yellow and the Blind Spot
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
Assist not available when towing a
situation and keep within the lane, especially
trailer See Owner's Manual message
if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
appears in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
i You can deactivate the warning lamp in the
exterior mirrors.
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
To do so, you will need to deactivate Blind
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
Spot Assist if:
a risk of an accident.
R the key is in key position 2 in the ignition
Always steer, apply the brakes or accelerate
lock
the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keep-
R the engine is not running
ing Assist alerts you.
Lane Keeping Assist
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-
ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
General notes
dent nor override the laws of physics. Lane
Keeping Assist cannot take into account road,
weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping
Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
lane.
Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle
in its lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumi-
nation of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or
: Lane Keeping Assist camera
spray
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
R glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or
your vehicle by means of camera : at the top of
reflections (e.g. if the road surface is wet)
the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects
R the windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged
lane markings on the road and can warn you
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g.
before you leave your lane unintentionally.
by a sticker
This function is available within a speed range
R there are no lane markings, or several unclear
between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.
lane markings are present for one lane, e.g.
around construction sites
Driving systems219R the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-The warning vibration occurs later if:ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowR the road has narrow lanesR the distance to the vehicle in front is too shortR you cut the corner on a bendand thus the lane markings cannot be detec-tedR the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesDriving Assistance Plus packagebranch off, cross one another or mergeR the road is very narrow and windingGeneral notesR there are highly variable shade conditions onDriving and parkingThe Driving Assistance Plus package consists ofthe roadDistance Pilot DISTRONIC ( Y page 181), ActiveActivating Lane Keeping AssistBlind Spot Assist ( Y page 219) and Active LaneKeeping Assist ( Y page 222).X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard orAdaptive ( Y page 251).Active Blind Spot AssistIf you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and laneGeneral notesmarkings are detected, the lines on the assis-tant display are shown in green ( Y page 249).Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas onLane Keeping Assist is ready for side of the vehicle that are not directlyvisible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facingStandardradar sensors. A warning lamp lights up on theIf Standard is selected, no warning vibrationexterior mirrors and draws your attention tooccurs if:vehicles detected in the monitored area. If youthen switch on the corresponding turn signal toR you have switched on the turn signal. In thischange lanes, you will also receive a visual andevent, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-audible collision warning. If a risk of side impacttain period of timeis detected, a course-corrective brake applica-R a driving safety system such as ABS, BAS ortion may help you avoid a collision. Active BlindESP ® intervenesSpot Assist evaluates the free space in the direc-tion of travel and to the side before making aAdaptivecourse-correcting brake application. For this,When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-A
Driving systems
219
R the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
The warning vibration occurs later if:
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R the road has narrow lanes
R the distance to the vehicle in front is too short
R you cut the corner on a bend
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
ted
R the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Driving Assistance Plus package
branch off, cross one another or merge
R the road is very narrow and winding
General notes
R there are highly variable shade conditions on
Driving and parking
The Driving Assistance Plus package consists of
the road
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ( Y page 181), Active
Activating Lane Keeping Assist
Blind Spot Assist ( Y page 219) and Active Lane
Keeping Assist ( Y page 222).
X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-
board computer; to do so, select Standard or
Adaptive ( Y page 251).
Active Blind Spot Assist
If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane
General notes
markings are detected, the lines on the assis-
tant display are shown in green ( Y page 249).
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on
Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.
either side of the vehicle that are not directly
visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing
Standard
radar sensors. A warning lamp lights up on the
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
exterior mirrors and draws your attention to
occurs if:
vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you
then switch on the corresponding turn signal to
R you have switched on the turn signal. In this
change lanes, you will also receive a visual and
event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-
audible collision warning. If a risk of side impact
tain period of time
is detected, a course-corrective brake applica-
R a driving safety system such as ABS, BAS or
tion may help you avoid a collision. Active Blind
ESP ® intervenes
Spot Assist evaluates the free space in the direc-
tion of travel and to the side before making a
Adaptive
course-correcting brake application. For this,
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing
tion occurs if:
radar sensors.
R you have switched on the turn signal. In this
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-
speed of approximately 30 km/h.
tain period of time
Important safety notes
R a driving safety system such as ABS, BAS or
ESP ® intervenes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not
R you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
a substitute for attentive driving.
R you brake hard
G WARNING
R you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to
obstacle or change lane quickly
vehicles:
R you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
To ensure that you are warned only when nec-
R overtaking too closely on the side, placing
essary and in good time if you cross the lane
them in the blind spot area
marking, the system detects certain conditions
R if the difference in the speed of approach
and warns you accordingly.
and overtaking is too great
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
R you approach the outer lane marking on a
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
bend
uations. There is a risk of an accident.
R the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway
R the system detects solid lane markings
Z
Driving systems220Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notAlways pay careful attention to the traffic sit-reliably and maintain a safe distance at the sideActive Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrowof the , such as motorcycles or bicycles, ormay detect them too sensorsIf the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in theThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors arelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may beintegrated into the front and rear bumpers andindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sureing in the middle of their lane. This may be theDriving and parkingthat the bumpers and the cover in the radiatorcase if vehicles are driving on the inner side oftrim are free of dirt, ice or slush. The sensorstheir not be covered, e.g. by cycle racks or over-On very wide lanes, vehicles in the lane next tohanging loads. Following an accident or in theyour vehicle may not be displayed if the vehiclesevent of damage to the bumpers, have the func-are too far of the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedDue to the nature of the system:specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assistmight otherwise no longer function properly.R warnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid boun-Monitoring rangedariesG WARNINGR warnings may be interrupted when you aredriving alongside particularly long vehicles,Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect allfor example lorries, for a prolonged timetraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an lampAlways make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.: Warning lampActive Blind Spot Assist is not operational atspeeds of below approximately 30 km/h. Vehi-cles in the monitoring range are then not Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, warninglamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellowat speeds of up to 30 km/h. A
Driving systems
220
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
reliably indicated.
uation and maintain a safe distance at the side
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow
of the vehicle.
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
may detect them too late.
Radar sensors
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
integrated into the front and rear bumpers and
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
Driving and parking
that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator
case if vehicles are driving on the inner side of
trim are free of dirt, ice or slush. The sensors
their lane.
must not be covered, e.g. by cycle racks or over-
On very wide lanes, vehicles in the lane next to
hanging loads. Following an accident or in the
your vehicle may not be displayed if the vehicles
event of damage to the bumpers, have the func-
are too far away.
tion of the radar sensors checked at a qualified
Due to the nature of the system:
specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist
might otherwise no longer function properly.
R warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid boun-
Monitoring range
daries
G WARNING
R warnings may be interrupted when you are
driving alongside particularly long vehicles,
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
for example lorries, for a prolonged time
traffic situations and road users. There is a
risk of an accident.
Warning lamp
Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
tance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.
: Warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at
speeds of below approximately 30 km/h. Vehi-
cles in the monitoring range are then not indi-
cated.
If Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, warning
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
at speeds of up to 30 km/h. At speeds above
30 km/h, the warning lamp goes out and Active
At a distance of approximately 0.5 m ; from
Blind Spot Assist is operational.
the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist monitors
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
the area up to 3.0 m next to = and behind :
range at speeds above 30 km/h, warning
your vehicle, as shown in the picture.
lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
This warning lamp always lights up when a vehi-
impaired in the following situations:
cle enters the blind spot monitoring range from
R dirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
behind or from the side. When you overtake a
R poor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray
Driving systems221vehicle, the warning occurs only if the differenceEither a course-correcting brake applicationin speed is less than 12 km/ to the driving situation, or none atall, may occur in the following situations:If you select reverse gear, Active Blind SpotAssist is not operational.R vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, areThe brightness of the warning lamps is auto-located on both sides of your vehiclematically adapted to the brightness of the sur-R a vehicle approaches too closely on the sideroundings.R you have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speedsVisual and audible collision warningDriving and parkingR you brake or accelerate significantlyIf you switch on the turn signals to change lanesR a driving safety system engages, such asand a vehicle is detected in the side monitoringESP ® or PRE-SAFE ® Brakerange, you receive a visual and acoustic collisionwarning. You then hear a double warning toneR ESP ® is deactivatedand red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn sig-R the Offroad program is activated (vehiclesnal remains on, detected vehicles are indicatedwithout the Off-Road Engineering package)by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There areR the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program isno further warning (vehicles with the Off-Road Engi-neering package)Course-correcting brake applicationR the LOW RANGE off-road gear is activatedIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side(vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor-age)recting brake application is carried out. This isR a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre isdesigned to help you avoid a WARNINGActivating Active Blind Spot AssistA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assistaccident.( Y page 250) is activated on the steer, brake or accelerate yourself,X Turn the key t
Driving systems
221
vehicle, the warning occurs only if the difference
Either a course-correcting brake application
in speed is less than 12 km/h.
appropriate to the driving situation, or none at
all, may occur in the following situations:
If you select reverse gear, Active Blind Spot
Assist is not operational.
R vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
located on both sides of your vehicle
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
R a vehicle approaches too closely on the side
roundings.
R you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds
Visual and audible collision warning
Driving and parking
R you brake or accelerate significantly
If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes
R a driving safety system engages, such as
and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring
ESP ® or PRE-SAFE ® Brake
range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision
warning. You then hear a double warning tone
R ESP ® is deactivated
and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn sig-
R the Offroad program is activated (vehicles
nal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated
without the Off-Road Engineering package)
by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are
R the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program is
no further warning tones.
activated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engi-
neering package)
Course-correcting brake application
R the LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side
(vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-
impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor-
age)
recting brake application is carried out. This is
R a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
designed to help you avoid a collision.
detected
G WARNING
Activating Active Blind Spot Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an
X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist
accident.
( Y page 250) is activated on the on-board
computer.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
X Turn the key to key position 2 in the ignition
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
lock.
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
sides.
then turn yellow.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
Towing a trailer
red warning lamp : flashes on the exterior mir-
If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you
ror and a double warning tone sounds. In addi-
have correctly established the electrical con-
tion, a display underlining the danger of a side
nection. This can be accomplished by checking
collision appears on the multifunction display.
the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is
In very rare cases, the system may make an
then deactivated. The indicator lamps in the
exterior mirrors light up yellow and the Active
inappropriate brake application. A course-cor-
Blind Spot Assist not available when
recting brake application may be interrupted at
towing a trailer See Owner's Manual
any time by countersteering slightly or acceler-
ating.
message appears in the multifunction display.
The course-correcting brake application is avail-
able within a speed range between 30 km/h and
200 km/h.
Z
Driving systems222Active Lane Keeping AssistIn such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:General notesR give an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleR neither give a warning nor interveneThere is a risk of an and parkingAlways pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing system may be impaired or may not functionActive Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area inin the following situations:front of your vehicle by means of multifunctioncamera : at the top of the windscreen. VariousR poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumi-different areas to the front, rear and side of yournation of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog orvehicle are also monitored with the aid of thesprayradar sensor system. Active Lane KeepingR glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun orAssist detects lane markings on the road andreflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the roadcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-surface is wet)tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, aR the windscreen is dirty, misted up, damagedlane-correcting brake application can bring theor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevehicle back into the original of the cameraThis function is available within a speed rangeR there are no lane markings, or several unclearbetween 60 km/h and 200 km/ markings for one lane are present, Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist youaround construction siteswhen driving, the radar sensor system must beR the lane markings are worn away, dark or up, e.g. by dirt or snowImportant safety notesR the distance to the vehicle in front is too shortand thus the lane markings cannot be detec-Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reducetedthe risk of an accident if you fail to adapt yourdriving style nor override the laws
Driving systems
222
Active Lane Keeping Assist
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
General notes
R give an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
R neither give a warning nor intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Driving and parking
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-
ing situation.
The system may be impaired or may not function
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
in the following situations:
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
camera : at the top of the windscreen. Various
R poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumi-
different areas to the front, rear and side of your
nation of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or
vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the
spray
radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping
R glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or
Assist detects lane markings on the road and
reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road
can warn you before you leave your lane unin-
surface is wet)
tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a
R the windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged
lane-correcting brake application can bring the
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vehicle back into the original lane.
vicinity of the camera
This function is available within a speed range
R there are no lane markings, or several unclear
between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.
lane markings for one lane are present, e.g.
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you
around construction sites
when driving, the radar sensor system must be
R the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
operational.
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Important safety notes
R the distance to the vehicle in front is too short
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce
ted
the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your
driving style nor override the laws of physics.
R the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into
branch off, cross one another or merge
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
R the road is very narrow and winding
Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You
R there are highly variable shade conditions on
are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
the road surface
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
R no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
and for staying in lane.
there are broken lane markings
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously
keep your vehicle in its lane.
Warning vibration through the steering
wheel
G WARNING
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
clearly detect lane markings.
intermittent vibration through the steering
wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
To ensure that you are warned only when nec-
essary and in good time if you cross the lane
Driving systems223marking, the system detects certain conditionsIf you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-and warns you , the vehicle will brake briefly on one is intended to help you return the vehicle toThe warning vibration occurs earlier in the fol-the original situations if:If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,R you approach the outer lane marking on adisplay : appears on the multifunction lane-correcting brake application can be madeR the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorwayafter driving over a lane marking recognised asR the system detects solid lane markingsbeing solid or broken. Before this, a warningDriving and parkingThe warning vibration occurs later in the follow-must have been issued by means of intermittenting situations if:vibration through the steering wheel. In addi-tion, a lane with lane markings on both sidesR the road has narrow lanesmust be detected.R you cut the corner on a bendIn the case of a broken lane marking beingLane-correcting brake applicationdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detectedG WARNINGin the adjacent lane. The following vehicles canA lane-correcting brake application cannothave an influence on brake application: oncom-ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi-always bring the vehicle back into the originalcles that are driving parallel to your . There is a risk of an accident.i A further lane-correcting brake applicationAlways steer, brake or accelerate yourself,can occur only after your vehicle has returnedespecially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsto the original or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-No lane-correcting brake application occurs following situations:G WARNINGR you clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-erateActive Lane Keeping Assist does not detectR you cut the corner on a sharp bendtraffic conditions or road users. In very rareR you have
Driving systems
223
marking, the system detects certain conditions
If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-
and warns you accordingly.
ces, the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.
This is intended to help you return the vehicle to
The warning vibration occurs earlier in the fol-
the original lane.
lowing situations if:
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
R you approach the outer lane marking on a
display : appears on the multifunction display.
bend
A lane-correcting brake application can be made
R the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway
after driving over a lane marking recognised as
R the system detects solid lane markings
being solid or broken. Before this, a warning
Driving and parking
The warning vibration occurs later in the follow-
must have been issued by means of intermittent
ing situations if:
vibration through the steering wheel. In addi-
tion, a lane with lane markings on both sides
R the road has narrow lanes
must be detected.
R you cut the corner on a bend
In the case of a broken lane marking being
Lane-correcting brake application
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been detected
G WARNING
in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
have an influence on brake application: oncom-
ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi-
always bring the vehicle back into the original
cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
i A further lane-correcting brake application
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
can occur only after your vehicle has returned
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
to the original lane.
you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-
No lane-correcting brake application occurs in
cation.
the following situations:
G WARNING
R you clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
erate
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
R you cut the corner on a sharp bend
traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
R you have switched on the turn signal
cases, the system may make an inappropriate
R a driving safety system engages, such as
brake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-
ESP ® , PRE-SAFE ® Brake or Active Blind Spot
ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of
Assist
an accident.
R you have adopted a sporty driving style with
An inappropriate brake application may be
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
eration
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
R ESP ® is deactivated
there is sufficient distance to the side for
R the transmission is not in position h
other traffic or obstacles.
R on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the elec-
trical connection to the trailer has been cor-
rectly established
R the Offroad program is activated (vehicles
without the Off-Road Engineering package)
R the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program is
activated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engi-
neering package)
R the LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated
(vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-
age)
Z
Driving systems224Towing a trailerR an obstacle has been detected in the lane inwhich you are drivingIf you couple up a trailer, make sure that youR a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre hashave correctly established the electrical con-been detected and displayednection. This can be accomplished by checkingthe trailer lighting. Lane-correcting brake appli-There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keep-cation does not take place when towing a Assist could misjudge the given traffic sit-Active Lane Keeping Assist is not activated anduation. An inappropriate brake application maythe lines in the assistance graphic are interrupted at any time in the following sit-uations:Driving and parkingR you steer slightly in the opposite directionOff-road driving systemsR you switch on the turn signalR you brake or accelerate significantly4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive)A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma-ted automatically in the following situations:nently driven. Together with ESP ® and 4ETS, itR a driving safety system engages, such asimproves the traction of your vehicle wheneverESP ® , PRE-SAFE ® Brake or Active Blind Spota drive wheel spins due to insufficient you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC canR lane markings are no longer detectedneither reduce the risk of an accident nor over-ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot takeActivating Active Lane Keeping Assistaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.X Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using the4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible foron-board computer; to do so, select Stand‐the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicleard or Adaptive ( Y page 251).speed, for braking in good time and for staying inIf you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and are detected, the lines in the assis-tance graphic are shown in green! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.( Y page 249). Active Lane Ke
Driving systems
224
Towing a trailer
R an obstacle has been detected in the lane in
which you are driving
If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you
R a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has
have correctly established the electrical con-
been detected and displayed
nection. This can be accomplished by checking
the trailer lighting. Lane-correcting brake appli-
There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keep-
cation does not take place when towing a trailer.
ing Assist could misjudge the given traffic sit-
Active Lane Keeping Assist is not activated and
uation. An inappropriate brake application may
the lines in the assistance graphic are grey.
be interrupted at any time in the following sit-
uations:
Driving and parking
R you steer slightly in the opposite direction
Off-road driving systems
R you switch on the turn signal
R you brake or accelerate significantly
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive)
A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma-
ted automatically in the following situations:
nently driven. Together with ESP ® and 4ETS, it
R a driving safety system engages, such as
improves the traction of your vehicle whenever
ESP ® , PRE-SAFE ® Brake or Active Blind Spot
a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip.
Assist
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
R lane markings are no longer detected
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over-
ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take
Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist
account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
X Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using the
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for
on-board computer; to do so, select Stand‐
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
ard or Adaptive ( Y page 251).
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane
lane.
markings are detected, the lines in the assis-
tance graphic are shown in green
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.
( Y page 249). Active Lane Keeping Assist is
This may damage the transfer case. Damage
ready for use.
of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
Benz implied warranty. All wheels must
remain either on the ground or be fully raised.
occurs if:
Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-
R you have switched on the turn signal: in this
cle with all wheels in full contact with the
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
ground.
certain period of time
R a driving safety system such as ABS, BAS or
! A function or performance test should only
be carried out on a twin-axle dynamometer.
ESP ® intervenes
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
Before you operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified
tion occurs if:
workshop. You could otherwise damage the
R you have switched on the turn signal: in this
drive train or the brake system.
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time
i In wintry road conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you
R a driving safety system such as ABS, BAS or
use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow
ESP ® intervenes
chains if necessary.
R you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
R you brake hard
( Y page 173).
R you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lane quickly
R you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Driving systems225DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)Activating DSRGeneral notesDSR is an aid to assist you when driving down-hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speedselected on the on-board computer. The steeperthe downhill gradient, the greater the DSR brak-ing effect on the vehicle. When driving on flatstretches of road or on an uphill gradient, theDriving and parkingDSR braking effect is minimal or controls the vehicle’s speed when it is acti-vated and the transmission is in position D, R orN. By accelerating or braking, you can alwaysdrive at a higher or a lower speed than that setX Press button :.on the on-board lamp ; lights safety notesThe à DSR symbol appears in the multi-function display.G WARNINGYou can only activate DSR when driving atIf the speed driven and the set speed deviatespeeds below 40 km/ you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Ãface, the wheels may lose traction. ThisDSR symbol appears in the multifunction displaywith the Max. speed 40 km/h the risk of skidding and having you have activated DSR and then change driveprograms, DSR is deactivated. If you switchBefore switching DSR on, please take intobetween the offroad and offroad plus drive pro-consideration the road surface and the differ-grams, DSR remains between driving speed and the setDeactivating DSRspeed.X Press button :.If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR canIndicator lamp ; goes reduce the risk of accident nor overrideThe à DSR symbol appears in the multi-the laws of physics. DSR cannot take account offunction display with the off , weather and traffic conditions. DSR is onlyan aid. You are responsible for the distance toDSR switches off automatically if you drivethe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak-faster than 45 km/h. The à DSR symboling in good time and for staying in in the m
Driving systems
225
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Activating DSR
General notes
DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down-
hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed
selected on the on-board computer. The steeper
the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR brak-
ing effect on the vehicle. When driving on flat
stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, the
Driving and parking
DSR braking effect is minimal or non-existent.
DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is acti-
vated and the transmission is in position D, R or
N. By accelerating or braking, you can always
drive at a higher or a lower speed than that set
X Press button :.
on the on-board computer.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
Important safety notes
The à DSR symbol appears in the multi-
function display.
G WARNING
You can only activate DSR when driving at
If the speed driven and the set speed deviate
speeds below 40 km/h.
and you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-
If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Ã
face, the wheels may lose traction. This
DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display
with the Max. speed 40 km/h message.
increases the risk of skidding and having an
accident.
If you have activated DSR and then change drive
programs, DSR is deactivated. If you switch
Before switching DSR on, please take into
between the offroad and offroad plus drive pro-
consideration the road surface and the differ-
grams, DSR remains activated.
ence between driving speed and the set
Deactivating DSR
speed.
X Press button :.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
The à DSR symbol appears in the multi-
the laws of physics. DSR cannot take account of
function display with the off message.
road, weather and traffic conditions. DSR is only
an aid. You are responsible for the distance to
DSR switches off automatically if you drive
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak-
faster than 45 km/h. The à DSR symbol
ing in good time and for staying in lane.
appears in the multifunction display with the
off message. The status indicator in the multi-
You are always responsible for keeping control
function display goes out. You also hear a warn-
of the vehicle and for assessing whether the
ing tone.
downhill gradient can be managed. DSR may not
always be able to keep to the set speed, depend-
On vehicles with the Offroad Engineering pack-
ing on road surface and tyre conditions. Select a
age, if you select a different drive program, DSR
set speed suitable for the prevailing conditions
is also deactivated. If you switch between the
and when necessary, apply the brakes manually.
offroad programs, DSR remains activated.
Z
Driving systems226Changing the set speedDo not use the Offroad drive program on roadsthat are snow-covered or icy, or if you have fittedyour vehicle with snow the Offroad drive programDriving and parkingX To increase or reduce the set speed in1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruisecontrol lever up : for a higher set speed ordown ; for a lower set the Offroad drive programThe set speed appears in the multifunctiondisplay with the à DSR symbol.X To select a drive program: turn DYNAMICSELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;When DSR is activated, you can change the setlights to a value between 2 km/h and 18 km/ Drive program "Offroad" 100 km/h message appears in thei The DSR set speed is always changed in1 km/h increments. This is regardless ofmultifunction you press the cruise control lever toThe vehicle is raised by 60 beyond the pressure vehicle is lowered to normal level again ifyou:Off-road program (vehicles without theR drive at speeds above 80 km/h (all vehiclesOff-Road Engineering package)except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)General notesR drive at speeds above 70 km/h (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Select the Offroad drive program for easilyR drive at speeds between 65 km/h andnegotiable offroad terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel80 km/h for approximately 20 seconds (allor sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restric-vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)ted to a limited degree and the drive wheels canR drive at speeds between 65 km/h andspin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-70 km/h for approximately 20 secondsting action for better traction. ABS, ESP ® and(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)4ETS programs especially adapted to off-roadThe vehicle changes from the Offroad drive pro-driving are activated. A gentle accelerator pedalcurve is also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedalgram to the Comfort drive program if you drivemust be depressed much further in order tofaster than 110 km/
Driving systems
226
Changing the set speed
Do not use the Offroad drive program on roads
that are snow-covered or icy, or if you have fitted
your vehicle with snow chains.
Selecting the Offroad drive program
Driving and parking
X To increase or reduce the set speed in
1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise
control lever up : for a higher set speed or
down ; for a lower set speed.
Selecting the Offroad drive program
The set speed appears in the multifunction
display with the à DSR symbol.
X To select a drive program: turn DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;
When DSR is activated, you can change the set
lights up.
speed to a value between 2 km/h and 18 km/h.
The Drive program "Offroad" Max.
speed 100 km/h message appears in the
i The DSR set speed is always changed in
1 km/h increments. This is regardless of
multifunction display.
whether you press the cruise control lever to
The vehicle is raised by 60 mm.
or beyond the pressure point.
The vehicle is lowered to normal level again if
you:
Off-road program (vehicles without the
R drive at speeds above 80 km/h (all vehicles
Off-Road Engineering package)
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
General notes
R drive at speeds above 70 km/h (Mercedes-
AMG vehicles)
Select the Offroad drive program for easily
R drive at speeds between 65 km/h and
negotiable offroad terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel
80 km/h for approximately 20 seconds (all
or sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restric-
vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
ted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can
R drive at speeds between 65 km/h and
spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
70 km/h for approximately 20 seconds
ting action for better traction. ABS, ESP ® and
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road
The vehicle changes from the Offroad drive pro-
driving are activated. A gentle accelerator pedal
curve is also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal
gram to the Comfort drive program if you drive
must be depressed much further in order to
faster than 110 km/h.
accelerate.
The Please reduce speed message appears in
You can select the Offroad drive program at
the multifunction display.
speeds below 100 km/h. The Drive program
Further information about "Driving off-road"
"Offroad" Max. speed 100 km/h message
( Y page 173).
appears in the multifunction display. If you drive
at speeds of more than 100 km/h and select the
Offroad drive program, the Please reduce
speed message appears in the multifunction
display. The last active drive program is selected
again.
Driving systems227Off-road programs (vehicles with thedisplay. The last active drive program is selectedOff-Road Engineering package) the Offroad drive programGeneral notesX To select a drive program: turn DYNAMICThe Offroad and Offroad Plus drive programsSELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;assist you when driving off-road. The engine’slights characteristics and the gearshift-The Drive program "Offroad" characteristics of the automatic transmis-speed 100 km/h message appears in thesion are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP ®Driving and parkingmultifunction 4ETS programs especially adapted to off-The vehicle is raised by 30 driving are activated. An accelerator pedalThe vehicle changes from the Offroad drive pro-curve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e. theaccelerator pedal must be depressed further togram to the Comfort drive program if you than 110 km/ Please reduce speed message appears inDo not use the Offroad or Offroad Plus driveprograms on roads that are snow-covered or icy,the multifunction if you have fitted your vehicle with snowOffroad Plus drive drive program: DYNAMIC SELECT controller; Offroad Plus drive program indicator lamp: DYNAMIC SELECT controllerSelect the Offroad Plus drive program for rough; Offroad drive program indicator lampterrain, e.g. for steep and/or uneven terrain orSelect the Offroad drive program for easilyfor driving on rocky offroad terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravelYour vehicle has an automatically activated dif-or sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restric-ferential lock for the transfer case. It controlsted to a limited degree and the drive wheels canthe balance between the front and rear . The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-The differential lock improves the vehicle's trac-ting action for better traction. ABS, ESP ® andtion. 4ETS ( Y page 74) controls the bal
Driving systems
227
Off-road programs (vehicles with the
display. The last active drive program is selected
Off-Road Engineering package)
again.
Selecting the Offroad drive program
General notes
X To select a drive program: turn DYNAMIC
The Offroad and Offroad Plus drive programs
SELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;
assist you when driving off-road. The engine’s
lights up.
performance characteristics and the gearshift-
The Drive program "Offroad" Max.
ing characteristics of the automatic transmis-
speed 100 km/h message appears in the
sion are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP ®
Driving and parking
multifunction display.
and 4ETS programs especially adapted to off-
The vehicle is raised by 30 mm.
road driving are activated. An accelerator pedal
The vehicle changes from the Offroad drive pro-
curve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e. the
accelerator pedal must be depressed further to
gram to the Comfort drive program if you drive
accelerate.
faster than 110 km/h.
The Please reduce speed message appears in
Do not use the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive
programs on roads that are snow-covered or icy,
the multifunction display.
or if you have fitted your vehicle with snow
Offroad Plus drive program
chains.
Offroad drive program
: DYNAMIC SELECT controller
; Offroad Plus drive program indicator lamp
: DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Select the Offroad Plus drive program for rough
; Offroad drive program indicator lamp
terrain, e.g. for steep and/or uneven terrain or
Select the Offroad drive program for easily
for driving on rocky terrain.
negotiable offroad terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel
Your vehicle has an automatically activated dif-
or sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restric-
ferential lock for the transfer case. It controls
ted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can
the balance between the front and rear axles.
spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
The differential lock improves the vehicle's trac-
ting action for better traction. ABS, ESP ® and
tion. 4ETS ( Y page 74) controls the balance
4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road
between both wheels on an axle.
driving are activated. A gentle accelerator pedal
curve is also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal
Selecting the Offroad Plus drive program
must be depressed much further in order to
X To select a drive program: turn DYNAMIC
accelerate.
SELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;
You can select the Offroad drive program at
lights up.
speeds below 100 km/h. The Drive program
The Drive program "Offroad Plus"
"Offroad" Max. speed 100 km/h message
Max. speed 40 km/h message appears in
appears in the multifunction display. If you drive
the multifunction display.
at speeds of more than 100 km/h and select the
Offroad drive program, the Please reduce
speed message appears in the multifunction
Z
Driving systems228R The Offroad Plus drive program is selectedGeneral notesand the vehicle is raised by 30 mm com-pared with the Offroad drive program.R DSR is switched on.R The differential lock is can select the Offroad Plus drive program atspeeds below 40 km/ Offroad Plus drive program automaticallyDriving and parkingswitches to the Offroad drive program if youdrive faster than 45 km/h. The Please reducespeed message appears in the information about "Driving off-road": LOW RANGE off-road gear button( Y page 173).; LOW RANGE off-road gear indicator lampLOW RANGE off-road gear (vehiclesHIGH RANGEPosition for all normal on-with the Off-Road Engineering package)road driving RANGEOff-road position for drivingImportant safety notesoff-road and fording.G WARNINGThe transmission ratioIf you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear onbetween the engine andwheels is only approx-a slippery road surface, the wheels could loseimately one third of that intraction:the HIGH RANGE road posi-R if you release the accelerator pedal whention. The drive torque is cor-respondingly higher as athe vehicle is in motionresult.R if Off-road ABS intervenes when brakingDo not use LOW RANGE:If the wheels lose traction, it will no longer beR on slippery road surfaces,possible to steer the vehicle. This increasese.g. in the event of slushthe risk of skidding and having an accident.R on snow or ice-coveredNever select the LOW RANGE off-road gearroadswhen driving on slippery road surfaces.R if you have snow chainson your vehicleG WARNINGIf you do not wait for the transfer case gearThe LOW RANGE off-road gear assists you whenchange process to complete, the transferdriving off-road and when fording. When LOWRANGE is engaged, the engine’s performancecase could remain in the neutral position. Thecharacteristics and the gearshifting character-power transmission to the driven wheels isistics of the automatic transmission are adaptedthen interrupted.
Driving systems
228
R The Offroad Plus drive program is selected
General notes
and the vehicle is raised by 30 mm com-
pared with the Offroad drive program.
R DSR is switched on.
R The differential lock is closed.
You can select the Offroad Plus drive program at
speeds below 40 km/h.
The Offroad Plus drive program automatically
Driving and parking
switches to the Offroad drive program if you
drive faster than 45 km/h. The Please reduce
speed message appears in the multifunction
display.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
: LOW RANGE off-road gear button
( Y page 173).
; LOW RANGE off-road gear indicator lamp
LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles
HIGH RANGE
Position for all normal on-
with the Off-Road Engineering package)
road driving conditions.
LOW RANGE
Off-road position for driving
Important safety notes
off-road and fording.
G WARNING
The transmission ratio
If you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear on
between the engine and
wheels is only approx-
a slippery road surface, the wheels could lose
imately one third of that in
traction:
the HIGH RANGE road posi-
R if you release the accelerator pedal when
tion. The drive torque is cor-
respondingly higher as a
the vehicle is in motion
result.
R if Off-road ABS intervenes when braking
Do not use LOW RANGE:
If the wheels lose traction, it will no longer be
R on slippery road surfaces,
possible to steer the vehicle. This increases
e.g. in the event of slush
the risk of skidding and having an accident.
R on snow or ice-covered
Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gear
roads
when driving on slippery road surfaces.
R if you have snow chains
on your vehicle
G WARNING
If you do not wait for the transfer case gear
The LOW RANGE off-road gear assists you when
change process to complete, the transfer
driving off-road and when fording. When LOW
RANGE is engaged, the engine’s performance
case could remain in the neutral position. The
characteristics and the gearshifting character-
power transmission to the driven wheels is
istics of the automatic transmission are adapted
then interrupted. There is a danger of the
for this purpose.
vehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is a
Further information about "Driving off-road"
risk of an accident.
( Y page 173). You will find information about
Wait until the transfer case shift process is
driving safety systems in conjunction with
LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section ( Y page 70).
completed.
Do not turn off the engine while changing gear
and do not shift the automatic transmission to
another position.
Driving systems229From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE! Only change from HIGH RANGE to LOWRANGE if:R the engine is runningR the transmission is in position NR you are driving at speeds below 40 km/hX Press LOW RANGE button :.Indicator lamp ; and parkingWhen the gear change is complete, indicatorlamp ; lights up. LOW RANGE indicatorappears in the multifunction display and in theX Press LOW RANGE button :.status lamp ; indicator lamp ; is flashing, you canWhen the gear change is complete, indicatorcancel the gear change by pressing LOWlamp ; goes out. In the multifunction dis-RANGE button : , the LOW RANGE Off message appearsand the status indicator goes out.i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if theSPORT drive program is activated. The LOWWhile indicator lamp ; is flashing, you canRANGE Not in drive program SPORT mes-cancel the gear change by pressing LOWRANGE button : then appears in the multifunction LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE! Only change from HIGH RANGE to LOWRANGE if:R the engine is runningR the transmission is in position NR if you are driving at speeds below50 km/hMessages in the multifunction displayIf a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed in themultifunction display:Display messagesPossible causes/consequences and M SolutionsLOW RANGE have been driving faster than 40 km/h. Additionally, the indicatorspeed 40 km/hlamp on the button in the centre console blinks.X Slow down to change RANGE Shift toThe transmission is in position D and you are driving at belowposition N briefly40 km/h.X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change process.Z
Driving systems
229
From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE
! Only change from HIGH RANGE to LOW
RANGE if:
R the engine is running
R the transmission is in position N
R you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h
X Press LOW RANGE button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes.
Driving and parking
When the gear change is complete, indicator
lamp ; lights up. LOW RANGE indicator
appears in the multifunction display and in the
X Press LOW RANGE button :.
status indicator.
Indicator lamp ; flashes.
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
When the gear change is complete, indicator
cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
lamp ; goes out. In the multifunction dis-
RANGE button : again.
play, the LOW RANGE Off message appears
and the status indicator goes out.
i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if the
SPORT drive program is activated. The LOW
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
RANGE Not in drive program SPORT mes-
cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
sage then appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE
! Only change from HIGH RANGE to LOW
RANGE if:
R the engine is running
R the transmission is in position N
R if you are driving at speeds below
50 km/h
Messages in the multifunction display
If a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed in the
multifunction display:
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
LOW RANGE Max.
You have been driving faster than 40 km/h. Additionally, the indicator
speed 40 km/h
lamp on the button in the centre console blinks.
X Slow down to change gear.
LOW RANGE Shift to
The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below
position N briefly
40 km/h.
X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change process.
Z
Towing a trailer230Display messagesPossible causes/consequences and M SolutionsLOW RANGE ShiftingThe gear change process was not carried PleaseX Maintain all gear change conditions and carry out the gear changereactivateprocess RANGE StopA warning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not beenApply parking brakecompleted. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no con-nection between the engine and the drive and parking! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the vehi-cle’s drive train.X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic conditionswhen doing so.X Apply the electric parking brake ( Y page 167).X Repeat the gear change the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGEStop Apply parking brake message dynamics display in theActivating the driving dynamics displayCOMAND display (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package)General notesThe driving dynamics display allows you to seethe selected drive program and additional infor-mation about the vehicle's operating status onthe COMAND display.X Switch on COMAND Online (see the DigitalOwner's Manual).X Press button :.The driving dynamics display appears in theCOMAND a trailer: Drive program selected; Status of the differential lock for the transferImportant safety notescaseG WARNING= Accelerator pedal position shown as %? Brake pedal position shown as %Vehicles with level control:A Status of the LOW RANGE off-road gearThe vehicle level may be changed uninten-B Angle of inclinationtionally, e.g. by other persons. If this happensC Steering anglewhile you are coupling or decoupling a trailer,D Uphill or downhill gradient as percentageyou could become trapped. In addition, otherE Level controlpeople could become trapped if their limbsF Compass with angle scale
Towing a trailer
230
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
LOW RANGE Shifting
The gear change process was not carried out.
cancelled Please
X Maintain all gear change conditions and carry out the gear change
reactivate
process again.
LOW RANGE Stop
A warning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not been
Apply parking brake
completed. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no con-
nection between the engine and the drive wheels.
Driving and parking
! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the vehi-
cle’s drive train.
X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic conditions
when doing so.
X Apply the electric parking brake ( Y page 167).
X Repeat the gear change process.
If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGE
Stop Apply parking brake message disappears.
Driving dynamics display in the
Activating the driving dynamics display
COMAND display (vehicles with the Off-
Road Engineering package)
General notes
The driving dynamics display allows you to see
the selected drive program and additional infor-
mation about the vehicle's operating status on
the COMAND display.
X Switch on COMAND Online (see the Digital
Owner's Manual).
X Press button :.
The driving dynamics display appears in the
COMAND display.
Towing a trailer
: Drive program selected
; Status of the differential lock for the transfer
Important safety notes
case
G WARNING
= Accelerator pedal position shown as %
? Brake pedal position shown as %
Vehicles with level control:
A Status of the LOW RANGE off-road gear
The vehicle level may be changed uninten-
B Angle of inclination
tionally, e.g. by other persons. If this happens
C Steering angle
while you are coupling or decoupling a trailer,
D Uphill or downhill gradient as percentage
you could become trapped. In addition, other
E Level control
people could become trapped if their limbs
F Compass with angle scale
Towing a trailer231To avoid hazardous situations:are between the vehicle body and the wheelsor underneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofR make sure to check the noseweight beforeeach journeyinjury.R use a drawbar noseweight as close as possi-When coupling or decoupling a trailer, makeble to the maximum noseweightsure that no one:R do not exceed the maximum permissibleR opens or closes the doors or the tailgatenoseweightR initiates a level change or turns theR do not use a noseweight lower than the min-Driving and parkingimum noseweightDYNAMIC SELECT ControllerWhen reversing the vehicle towards the trailer,R locks or unlocks the vehiclemake sure there is nobody between the trailerand the vehicle.G WARNINGCouple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If youYou could lose control of the vehicle/trailerdo not couple the trailer to the towing vehiclecombination if it begins to swerve. The vehi-correctly, the trailer could become combination could even sure that the following values are notexceeded:There is a risk of an no account should you attempt toR the permissible trailer drawbar noseweightstraighten out the vehicle/trailer combina-R the permissible trailer loadtion by increasing speed. Decrease yourR the permissible rear axle load of the towingvehiclespeed and do not countersteer. Brake if nec-essary.R the maximum permissible gross vehicleweight of both the towing vehicle and theG WARNINGtrailerThe applicable permissible values, which mustIf the maximum permissible load for a carriernot be exceeded, can be found:system is exceeded, the carrier could comeR in your vehicle documentsloose from the vehicle and endanger otherR on the identification plates of the trailer towroad users. There is a risk of an accident andhitch and the trailerinjury.R on the vehicle identification plateNever exceed the maximum permissible loadIf the values differ, the lowest value using a will find the values approved by t
Towing a trailer
231
To avoid hazardous situations:
are between the vehicle body and the wheels
or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
R make sure to check the noseweight before
each journey
injury.
R use a drawbar noseweight as close as possi-
When coupling or decoupling a trailer, make
ble to the maximum noseweight
sure that no one:
R do not exceed the maximum permissible
R opens or closes the doors or the tailgate
noseweight
R initiates a level change or turns the
R do not use a noseweight lower than the min-
Driving and parking
imum noseweight
DYNAMIC SELECT Controller
When reversing the vehicle towards the trailer,
R locks or unlocks the vehicle
make sure there is nobody between the trailer
and the vehicle.
G WARNING
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you
You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer
do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle
combination if it begins to swerve. The vehi-
correctly, the trailer could become detached.
cle/trailer combination could even overturn.
Make sure that the following values are not
exceeded:
There is a risk of an accident.
On no account should you attempt to
R the permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
straighten out the vehicle/trailer combina-
R the permissible trailer load
tion by increasing speed. Decrease your
R the permissible rear axle load of the towing
vehicle
speed and do not countersteer. Brake if nec-
essary.
R the maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight of both the towing vehicle and the
G WARNING
trailer
The applicable permissible values, which must
If the maximum permissible load for a carrier
not be exceeded, can be found:
system is exceeded, the carrier could come
R in your vehicle documents
loose from the vehicle and endanger other
R on the identification plates of the trailer tow
road users. There is a risk of an accident and
hitch and the trailer
injury.
R on the vehicle identification plate
Never exceed the maximum permissible load
If the values differ, the lowest value applies.
when using a carrier.
You will find the values approved by the manu-
facturer on the vehicle identification plates and
Exceeding the maximum permissible nose-
those for the towing vehicle under "Technical
weight of the trailer drawbar on the ball coupling
data" ( Y page 397).
may cause damage to the following:
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
R your vehicle
characteristics will be different in comparison to
R the trailer
when driving without a trailer.
R the ball coupling
The vehicle/trailer combination:
R trailer tow hitch
R is heavier
The vehicle/trailer combination could become
R is restricted in its acceleration and gradient-
unstable.
climbing capability
If the noseweight used is lower than the mini-
R has an increased braking distance
mum permissible noseweight, the vehicle/
R is affected more by strong crosswinds
trailer combination could also become unstable.
R demands more sensitive steering
R has a larger turning circle
This can impair the vehicle's handling charac-
teristics. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Maintain a safe distance. Drive carefully.
Z
Towing a trailer232When towing a trailer, always adjust your speedtrailer combination may not exceed a maximumto the current road and weather conditions. Dospeed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning thenot exceed the maximum permissible speed foroperating permit. This also applies in countriesyour vehicle/trailer which the maximum permissible speed forvehicle/trailer combinations is above100 km/ on towing a trailerWhen towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different from when driv-General notesing without a trailer and the vehicle will consumeDriving and parkingmore fuel.! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,Use the left-hand gearshift paddle to shift to achanges to the engine cooling system may belower gear on long and steep downhill , depending on the vehicle also applies if you have activated cruiseIf you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,control, the speed limiter or Distance Pilotobserve the anchorage points on the the tyre pressures when towing a will use the braking effect of the engine, soYou will find the values in the tyre pressure tableless braking will be required to maintain thein the vehicle fuel filler flap ( Y page 370).vehicle speed. This relieves the load on thebrake system and prevents the brakes fromPlease note that when towing a trailer, the fol-overheating and wearing too quickly. If you needlowing driving systems have limited availabilityadditional braking, depress the brake pedalor are not available at all:repeatedly rather than continuously.R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( Y page 198)R Blind Spot Assist ( Y page 216)Driving tipsR Active Lane Keeping Assist ( Y page 222)If the trailer swings from side to side:R Parking Pilot ( Y page 201)On vehicles without level control, the height ofX Do not accelerate under any ball coupling will alter according to the loadX Do not on the vehicle. If
Towing a trailer
232
When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed
trailer combination may not exceed a maximum
to the current road and weather conditions. Do
speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the
not exceed the maximum permissible speed for
operating permit. This also applies in countries
your vehicle/trailer combination.
in which the maximum permissible speed for
vehicle/trailer combinations is above
100 km/h.
Notes on towing a trailer
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different from when driv-
General notes
ing without a trailer and the vehicle will consume
Driving and parking
more fuel.
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
Use the left-hand gearshift paddle to shift to a
changes to the engine cooling system may be
lower gear on long and steep downhill gradients.
necessary, depending on the vehicle type.
This also applies if you have activated cruise
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
control, the speed limiter or Distance Pilot
observe the anchorage points on the chassis.
DISTRONIC.
Check the tyre pressures when towing a trailer.
This will use the braking effect of the engine, so
You will find the values in the tyre pressure table
less braking will be required to maintain the
in the vehicle fuel filler flap ( Y page 370).
vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the
brake system and prevents the brakes from
Please note that when towing a trailer, the fol-
overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need
lowing driving systems have limited availability
additional braking, depress the brake pedal
or are not available at all:
repeatedly rather than continuously.
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( Y page 198)
R Blind Spot Assist ( Y page 216)
Driving tips
R Active Lane Keeping Assist ( Y page 222)
If the trailer swings from side to side:
R Parking Pilot ( Y page 201)
On vehicles without level control, the height of
X Do not accelerate under any circumstances.
the ball coupling will alter according to the load
X Do not countersteer.
placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer
X Brake, if necessary.
with a height-adjustable drawbar.
R Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in
You will find permissible trailer loads under
front than when driving without a trailer.
"Technical data" ( Y page 397).
R Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gen-
tly at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,
Driving tips
increase the braking force rapidly.
Observe the information on ESP ® trailer stabili-
R The values given for gradient-climbing capa-
sation ( Y page 76) and on pulling away with a
bilities from a standstill refer to sea level.
trailer ( Y page 147).
When driving in mountainous areas, note that
the power output of the engine, and conse-
Select the Comfort drive program using the
quently the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-
DYNAMIC SELECT controller ( Y page 151).
bility from a standstill, decrease with increas-
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
ing altitude.
trailer combinations depends on the type of
trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the
trailer's documents to see what the maximum
Swivelling the ball coupling out/in
permissible speed is for your trailer. Observe the
legally permissible maximum speed in the rele-
Using the switch in the driver's door
vant country.
For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maxi-
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
mum permissible rear axle load is increased
Owner's Manual.
when towing a trailer. See the "Technical data"
section to find out whether this applies to your
vehicle ( Y page 397). If when towing, the rear
axle load is increased even partly, the vehicle/
Towing a trailer233G WARNINGThe ball coupling swivels back into the startingposition when:If the ball coupling is not engaged, the trailerR you drive off before the Trailer couplingmay come loose. There is a risk of an ... display message has disap-Make sure that the ball coupling is securelypeared from the multifunction displayengaged and locked in position.R the ball coupling encounters an obstacle inthe swivel range! Do not attempt to speed the up the swing-Swivelling in (all vehicles, except plug-inout procedure by applying additional pressurehybrid):Driving and parkingwith your foot. The system could otherwise beX Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andmechanically trailer cables are swivel out the ball coupling, you have twoX Place the protective cap on the ball :X Shift the transmission to position P.R use the switch on the driver's door (all vehi-X Switch the ignition except plug-in hybrid vehicles)X Pull switch : briefly.R use the switch on the tailgateAfter a short time, the ball coupling swivels inThe trailer socket is integrated into the ball cou-under the rear bumper. It can take up to sevenpling and swivels out with before the ball coupling visibly swiv-Release the ball coupling only when the swivelels is the ball coupling engages in a securelylocked position under the bumper:R indicator lamp ; flashesR the multifunction display shows the Trailercoupling extending... display messageThe ball coupling swivels back into the startingposition when:R you drive off before the Trailer couplingextending... display message has disap-peared from the multifunction displayR the ball coupling encounters an obstacle inthe swivel rangeSwivelling out (all vehicles, except plug-inhybrid):Using the switch on the tailgateX Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch the ignition on.X Pull switch : a sh
Towing a trailer
233
G WARNING
The ball coupling swivels back into the starting
position when:
If the ball coupling is not engaged, the trailer
R you drive off before the Trailer coupling
may come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
extending... display message has disap-
Make sure that the ball coupling is securely
peared from the multifunction display
engaged and locked in position.
R the ball coupling encounters an obstacle in
the swivel range
! Do not attempt to speed the up the swing-
Swivelling in (all vehicles, except plug-in
out procedure by applying additional pressure
hybrid):
Driving and parking
with your foot. The system could otherwise be
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
mechanically damaged.
the trailer cables are disconnected.
To swivel out the ball coupling, you have two
X Place the protective cap on the ball coupling.
options:
X Shift the transmission to position P.
R use the switch on the driver's door (all vehi-
X Switch the ignition on.
cles except plug-in hybrid vehicles)
X Pull switch : briefly.
R use the switch on the tailgate
After a short time, the ball coupling swivels in
The trailer socket is integrated into the ball cou-
under the rear bumper. It can take up to seven
pling and swivels out with it.
seconds before the ball coupling visibly swiv-
Release the ball coupling only when the swivel
els in.
range is unobstructed.
Until the ball coupling engages in a securely
locked position under the bumper:
R indicator lamp ; flashes
R the multifunction display shows the Trailer
coupling extending... display message
The ball coupling swivels back into the starting
position when:
R you drive off before the Trailer coupling
extending... display message has disap-
peared from the multifunction display
R the ball coupling encounters an obstacle in
the swivel range
Swivelling out (all vehicles, except plug-in
hybrid):
Using the switch on the tailgate
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch the ignition on.
X Pull switch : briefly.
After a short time, the ball coupling swivels
out from under the rear bumper. It can take up
to seven seconds before the ball coupling
visibly swivels out.
X Remove the protective cap from the ball cou-
pling and store it in a safe place.
Until the ball coupling vertically engages in a
securely locked position:
Swivelling out:
R indicator lamp ; flashes
R the multifunction display shows the Trailer
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
coupling extending... display message
X Open the tailgate.
Z
Towing a trailer234X Pull switch : you disconnect the trailer cable, the vehicleAfter a short time, the ball coupling swivelsis lowered. This can cause you or others toout from under the rear bumper. It can take upbecome trapped between the vehicle bodyto seven seconds before the ball couplingand tyres, or underneath the vehicle. Thisvisibly swivels a risk of injury.X Remove the protective cap from the ball cou-pling and store it in a safe sure that no-one is in the immediateUntil the ball coupling vertically engages in avicinity of the wheel arch or underneath thesecurely locked position:vehicle when disconnecting the trailer and parkingR indicator lamp ; flashesR the multifunction display shows the TrailerSteel-sprung vehiclescoupling extending... display messageX Shift the transmission to position ball coupling swivels back into the startingX Apply the electric parking when:R you drive off before the Trailer couplingX Position the trailer horizontally behind theextending... display message has disap-vehicle.X Couple up the from the multifunction displayX Establish the electrical connection betweenR the ball coupling encounters an obstacle inthe vehicle and the swivel rangeX Check that the trailer lighting system is work-Swivelling in:ing.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andX Push the combination switch upwards andthe trailer cables are and check whether the corre-X Place the protective cap on the ball turn signal indicator on the trailer isX Open the .X Pull switch : briefly.A connected trailer is detected only when theAfter a short time, the ball coupling swivels inelectrical connection is established correctlyunder the rear bumper. It can take up to sevenand when the lighting system is working prop-seconds before the ball coupling visibly swiv-erly. The function of other systems also dependsels t
Towing a trailer
234
X Pull switch : briefly.
If you disconnect the trailer cable, the vehicle
After a short time, the ball coupling swivels
is lowered. This can cause you or others to
out from under the rear bumper. It can take up
become trapped between the vehicle body
to seven seconds before the ball coupling
and tyres, or underneath the vehicle. This
visibly swivels out.
poses a risk of injury.
X Remove the protective cap from the ball cou-
pling and store it in a safe place.
Make sure that no-one is in the immediate
Until the ball coupling vertically engages in a
vicinity of the wheel arch or underneath the
securely locked position:
vehicle when disconnecting the trailer cable.
Driving and parking
R indicator lamp ; flashes
R the multifunction display shows the Trailer
Steel-sprung vehicles
coupling extending... display message
X Shift the transmission to position P.
The ball coupling swivels back into the starting
X Apply the electric parking brake.
position when:
R you drive off before the Trailer coupling
X Position the trailer horizontally behind the
extending... display message has disap-
vehicle.
X Couple up the trailer.
peared from the multifunction display
X Establish the electrical connection between
R the ball coupling encounters an obstacle in
the vehicle and the trailer.
the swivel range
X Check that the trailer lighting system is work-
Swivelling in:
ing.
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
X Push the combination switch upwards and
the trailer cables are disconnected.
downwards and check whether the corre-
X Place the protective cap on the ball coupling.
sponding turn signal indicator on the trailer is
X Open the tailgate.
flashing.
X Pull switch : briefly.
A connected trailer is detected only when the
After a short time, the ball coupling swivels in
electrical connection is established correctly
under the rear bumper. It can take up to seven
and when the lighting system is working prop-
seconds before the ball coupling visibly swiv-
erly. The function of other systems also depends
els in.
on this, for example:
Until the ball coupling engages in a securely
R ESP ®
locked position under the bumper:
R PARKTRONIC Parking Assist
R indicator lamp ; flashes
R Parking Pilot
R the multifunction display shows the Trailer
R Active Blind Spot Assist
coupling extending... display message
R Active Lane Keeping Assist
The ball coupling swivels back into the starting
position when:
Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package
R you drive off before the Trailer coupling
extending... display message has disap-
! Before beginning the journey, make sure
peared from the multifunction display
that the trailer support wheel is completely
raised. Otherwise, the trailer or the vehicle
R the ball coupling encounters an obstacle in
could be damaged by the lowered trailer sup-
the swivel range
port wheel during the journey.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
Coupling up a trailer
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Start the engine.
Important safety notes
X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering
G WARNING
package: set the vehicle level to normal level
( Y page 190).
Vehicles with level control:
Towing a trailer235X Vehicles without the Off-Road Engineer-Uncoupling a trailering package: select the Comfort drive pro-Important safety notesgram using the DYNAMIC SELECT controller( Y page 194).G WARNINGX Switch off the engine.X Close the doors and you uncouple a trailer with an engaged over-X Position the trailer horizontally behind therun brake, you could trap your hand vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This posesDriving and parkingX Couple up the trailer.a risk of injury.X Establish the electrical connection betweenDo not uncouple a trailer with an engagedthe vehicle and the brake.X Check that the trailer lighting system is work-ing.G WARNINGX Push the combination switch upwards andVehicles with level control:downwards and check whether the corre-sponding turn signal indicator on the trailer isIf you disconnect the trailer cable, the lowered. This can cause you or others toA connected trailer is detected only when thebecome trapped between the vehicle bodyelectrical connection is established correctlyand tyres, or underneath the vehicle. Thisand when the lighting system is working prop-poses a risk of . The function of other systems also dependsMake sure that no-one is in the immediateon this, for example:vicinity of the wheel arch or underneath theR ESP ®vehicle when disconnecting the trailer cable.R PARKTRONIC Parking AssistR Parking Pilot! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engagedR Active Blind Spot Assistoverrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle couldbe damaged by the rebounding of the overrunR Active Lane Keeping Assistbrake.i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: if! Remove the adapter cable before folding inyou couple up a trailer, the vehicle initiallythe ball coupling. You could otherwise dam-remains at the selected level of the drive pro-age the rear bumper and the adapter set. Observe the following when cou-pling up a trailer:Steel-sprung vehiclesR If the normal lev
Towing a trailer
235
X Vehicles without the Off-Road Engineer-
Uncoupling a trailer
ing package: select the Comfort drive pro-
Important safety notes
gram using the DYNAMIC SELECT controller
( Y page 194).
G WARNING
X Switch off the engine.
X Close the doors and tailgate.
If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged over-
X Position the trailer horizontally behind the
run brake, you could trap your hand between
vehicle.
the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses
Driving and parking
X Couple up the trailer.
a risk of injury.
X Establish the electrical connection between
Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged
the vehicle and the trailer.
overrun brake.
X Check that the trailer lighting system is work-
ing.
G WARNING
X Push the combination switch upwards and
Vehicles with level control:
downwards and check whether the corre-
sponding turn signal indicator on the trailer is
If you disconnect the trailer cable, the vehicle
flashing.
is lowered. This can cause you or others to
A connected trailer is detected only when the
become trapped between the vehicle body
electrical connection is established correctly
and tyres, or underneath the vehicle. This
and when the lighting system is working prop-
poses a risk of injury.
erly. The function of other systems also depends
Make sure that no-one is in the immediate
on this, for example:
vicinity of the wheel arch or underneath the
R ESP ®
vehicle when disconnecting the trailer cable.
R PARKTRONIC Parking Assist
R Parking Pilot
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged
R Active Blind Spot Assist
overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could
be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun
R Active Lane Keeping Assist
brake.
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: if
! Remove the adapter cable before folding in
you couple up a trailer, the vehicle initially
the ball coupling. You could otherwise dam-
remains at the selected level of the drive pro-
age the rear bumper and the adapter cable.
gram set. Observe the following when cou-
pling up a trailer:
Steel-sprung vehicles
R If the normal level was not selected previ-
ously, the vehicle automatically adopts the
X Shift the transmission to position P.
normal level starting from a speed of
30 km/h. Even at higher speeds, it does not
X Apply the electric parking brake.
drop below the normal level.
X Secure the trailer against rolling away.
R Vehicle levels below the normal level are
X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the
not available.
trailer.
R The raised level is available up to a speed of
30 km/h.
Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package
R This also applies when using accessories
X Shift the transmission to position P.
that are plugged into the socket of the
trailer tow hitch (e.g. a bicycle rack).
X Apply the electric parking brake.
R Before driving with a trailer, please observe
X Start the engine.
the information on the trailer support
X Close the doors and tailgate.
wheel.
X Secure the trailer against rolling away.
Z
Towing a trailer236X Remove the trailer cable and decouple theTrailer with 7-pin notesX Switch off the with 7-pin connector: you can connectto the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling usingTrailer power supplyan adapter or, if necessary, an adapter can be obtained at a qualified specialist! You can connect accessories with a of up to 180 W to the permanent powerDriving and parkingsupply and with a power rating of up to 180 WFitting the adapterto the power supply that is switched on via theignition lock.! Make sure that there is sufficient cable playThe trailer battery may not be charged fromso that the cable cannot become detachedthe power it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer! Remove the adapter cable before folding insocket is equipped with a permanent powerthe ball coupling. You could otherwise dam-supply and a power supply that is switched onage the rear bumper and the adapter the ignition permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin 9.The power supply that is switched on via theignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10.The trailer's permanent power supply isswitched off in the event of low on-board voltageand after six hours at the can find more information about installingthe trailer electrics at a qualified specialist work-shop.X To switch the connected power supply onor off: turn the key in the ignition lock toX Open the socket 2 or u( Y page 144).X Insert the plug connector with lug : intogroove = on the socket.X Turn bayonet connection ; clockwise to theFailure check for LEDsstop.X Let the cover LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, a malfunc-tion message may appear in the multifunctionX If you are using an adapter cable, secure thedisplay even if there is no fault. The reason forcable to the trailer with cable error message may be that the current hasfallen below the m
Towing a trailer
236
X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the
Trailer with 7-pin connector
trailer.
General notes
X Switch off the engine.
Trailer with 7-pin connector: you can connect
to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using
Trailer power supply
an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable.
Both can be obtained at a qualified specialist
! You can connect accessories with a power
workshop.
rating of up to 180 W to the permanent power
Driving and parking
supply and with a power rating of up to 180 W
Fitting the adapter
to the power supply that is switched on via the
ignition lock.
! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play
The trailer battery may not be charged from
so that the cable cannot become detached
the power supply.
when cornering.
When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer
! Remove the adapter cable before folding in
socket is equipped with a permanent power
the ball coupling. You could otherwise dam-
supply and a power supply that is switched on
age the rear bumper and the adapter cable.
via the ignition lock.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
trailer socket pin 9.
The power supply that is switched on via the
ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10.
The trailer's permanent power supply is
switched off in the event of low on-board voltage
and after six hours at the latest.
You can find more information about installing
the trailer electrics at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
X To switch the connected power supply on
or off: turn the key in the ignition lock to
X Open the socket cover.
position 2 or u( Y page 144).
X Insert the plug connector with lug : into
groove = on the socket.
X Turn bayonet connection ; clockwise to the
Failure check for LEDs
stop.
X Let the cover engage.
If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, a malfunc-
tion message may appear in the multifunction
X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the
display even if there is no fault. The reason for
cable to the trailer with cable ties.
the error message may be that the current has
fallen below the minimum of 50 mA.
To ensure reliable indication of the failure, each
LED chain in the trailer lighting must be guaran-
teed a minimum current of 50 mA.
Towing a trailer237Problems towing a trailerProblemPossible causes/consequences and M SolutionsThe displaced ball cou-R The indicator lamp on the button flashes.R The Check trailer hitch lock message appears on the multi-pling does not reach thesecurely locked display.X Initiate a new swivelling and parkingIf the ball coupling does not reach the securely locked position as aresult:X Start the Pull and hold the switch during the whole swivelling the unlocked ball coupling does not reach the securely locked posi-tion even after several attempts:X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance before continu-ing the journey.X Consult a qualified specialist long as the Check trailer hitch lock display message isshown on the multifunction display, no trailer should be using theThe on-board voltage is too lowbutton on the tailgate: X Start the ball coupling doesnot swivel, even though: If the ball coupling still does not unlock:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.R the vehicle is station-aryR no trailer cable is con-nectedR the switch was brieflypulledZ
Towing a trailer
237
Problems towing a trailer
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The displaced ball cou-
R The indicator lamp on the button flashes.
R The Check trailer hitch lock message appears on the multi-
pling does not reach the
securely locked position.
function display.
X Initiate a new swivelling procedure.
Driving and parking
If the ball coupling does not reach the securely locked position as a
result:
X Start the engine.
or
X Pull and hold the switch during the whole swivelling procedure.
If the unlocked ball coupling does not reach the securely locked posi-
tion even after several attempts:
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance before continu-
ing the journey.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
As long as the Check trailer hitch lock display message is
shown on the multifunction display, no trailer should be attached.
Unlocking using the
The on-board voltage is too low
button on the tailgate: X Start the engine.
The ball coupling does
not swivel, even though: If the ball coupling still does not unlock:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
R the vehicle is station-
ary
R no trailer cable is con-
nected
R the switch was briefly
pulled
Z
Bicycle rack238ProblemPossible causes/consequences and M SolutionsUnlocking using theThe on-board voltage is too lowbutton in the driver'sX Engage parking position j .door (all vehiclesexcept plug-in hybrid): X Switch on the power ball coupling doesnot swivel, even though: X Start the the ball coupling still does not unlock:Driving and parkingR the vehicle is station-aryX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.R no trailer cable is con-nectedThe ball coupling doesThere is a malfunction in the release swivel. The indicator X When the ball coupling is swivelled in: pull and hold the switchlamp in the switch ison the tailgate until the ball coupling vertically engages in a securelyflashing position and then engages again under the Check trailerhitch lock messageWhenthe ball coupling is swivelled out: pull and hold the switchXon the tailgate until the ball coupling engages under the on the multi-function the ball coupling still does not unlock:X Consult a qualified specialist transport bicycles with a gross weightBicycle rackbetween 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycleGeneral notesracks with additional anchorage on guide pin ;.Important safety notesG WARNINGThe bicycle rack can detach from the vehicle ifyouR exceed the permissible payload of thetrailer tow hitchR use the bicycle rack incorrectlyR attach the bicycle rack to the ball couplingTrailer tow hitch (example with additionalbeneath the ball headguide pin)There is a risk of an on the bicycle rack's design, you canFor your safety and that of other road users,transport up to four bicycles on it:observe the following:R When attached by clamping onto the ball cou-R Always observe the permissible payload ofpling :, the maximum payload is 75 kg. Youcan transport up to three trailer tow hitch.R When attached to ball coupling : and alsoR Use the bicycle rack only to transport bicy-guide
Bicycle rack
238
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Unlocking using the
The on-board voltage is too low
button in the driver's
X Engage parking position j .
door (all vehicles
except plug-in hybrid): X Switch on the power supply.
or
The ball coupling does
not swivel, even though: X Start the engine.
If the ball coupling still does not unlock:
Driving and parking
R the vehicle is station-
ary
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
R no trailer cable is con-
nected
The ball coupling does
There is a malfunction in the release electronics.
not swivel. The indicator X When the ball coupling is swivelled in: pull and hold the switch
lamp in the switch is
on the tailgate until the ball coupling vertically engages in a securely
flashing permanently.
locked position and then engages again under the bumper.
The Check trailer
hitch lock message
When
the ball coupling is swivelled out: pull and hold the switch
X
on the tailgate until the ball coupling engages under the bumper.
appears on the multi-
function display.
If the ball coupling still does not unlock:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
To transport bicycles with a gross weight
Bicycle rack
between 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycle
General notes
racks with additional anchorage on guide pin ;.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The bicycle rack can detach from the vehicle if
you
R exceed the permissible payload of the
trailer tow hitch
R use the bicycle rack incorrectly
R attach the bicycle rack to the ball coupling
Trailer tow hitch (example with additional
beneath the ball head
guide pin)
There is a risk of an accident.
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, you can
For your safety and that of other road users,
transport up to four bicycles on it:
observe the following:
R When attached by clamping onto the ball cou-
R Always observe the permissible payload of
pling :, the maximum payload is 75 kg. You
can transport up to three bicycles.
the trailer tow hitch.
R When attached to ball coupling : and also
R Use the bicycle rack only to transport bicy-
guide pin ;, the maximum payload is 100 kg.
cles.
You can transport up to four bicycles.
The payload is calculated from the weight of the
bicycle rack and the load on the bicycle rack.
Bicycle rack239Bicycle racks cause your vehicle's driving char-R Always attach the bicycle rack correctly byacteristics to change. The vehicle:clamping onto the ball head and, if possible,R is heavierto the guide pin on the ball coupling as well.R is restricted in its acceleration and gradient-R To transport four bicycles, always use bicy-climbing capabilitycle racks with additional support on the ballR has an increased braking distancecoupling's guide can impair the vehicle's handling charac-R Use only bicycle racks approved byteristics. Adapt your driving style and parkingMaintain a safe distance and drive carefully.R Always comply with the bicycle rack's oper-When using bicycle racks, set the tyre pressureon the rear axle of the vehicle for the maximumating . Further information on tyre pressure canbe found in the tyre pressure table! Using unsuitable bicycle racks or using( Y page 370).them incorrectly can cause damage to andfractures in the trailer tow only bicycle racks approved instructionsThe greater the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the higher the loadexerted on the trailer tow , observe the following notes:R attach heavy bicycles as close as possible to the vehicleR always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as symmetrically as possible to the vehicle longi-tudinal axisBefore loading the bicycle rack, Mercedes-Benz advises you to remove all add-on parts from thebicycles, e.g. bicycle baskets, child seats or batteries. This will allow you to improve the aerody-namic resistance and the bicycle rack's centre of secure bicycles against slipping and check that they are firmly seated at regular not use tarpaulins or other covers. This could impair the driving characteristics and rear aerodynamic resistance would also rise, and so would the load exerted on the trailer tow hitchas a
Bicycle rack
239
Bicycle racks cause your vehicle's driving char-
R Always attach the bicycle rack correctly by
acteristics to change. The vehicle:
clamping onto the ball head and, if possible,
R is heavier
to the guide pin on the ball coupling as well.
R is restricted in its acceleration and gradient-
R To transport four bicycles, always use bicy-
climbing capability
cle racks with additional support on the ball
R has an increased braking distance
coupling's guide pin.
This can impair the vehicle's handling charac-
R Use only bicycle racks approved by
teristics. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz.
Driving and parking
Maintain a safe distance and drive carefully.
R Always comply with the bicycle rack's oper-
When using bicycle racks, set the tyre pressure
on the rear axle of the vehicle for the maximum
ating manual.
load. Further information on tyre pressure can
be found in the tyre pressure table
! Using unsuitable bicycle racks or using
( Y page 370).
them incorrectly can cause damage to and
fractures in the trailer tow hitch.
Use only bicycle racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Loading instructions
The greater the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the higher the load
exerted on the trailer tow hitch.
Therefore, observe the following notes:
R attach heavy bicycles as close as possible to the vehicle
R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as symmetrically as possible to the vehicle longi-
tudinal axis
Before loading the bicycle rack, Mercedes-Benz advises you to remove all add-on parts from the
bicycles, e.g. bicycle baskets, child seats or batteries. This will allow you to improve the aerody-
namic resistance and the bicycle rack's centre of gravity.
Always secure bicycles against slipping and check that they are firmly seated at regular intervals.
Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. This could impair the driving characteristics and rear visibility.
The aerodynamic resistance would also rise, and so would the load exerted on the trailer tow hitch
as a result.
Z
Bicycle rack240Driving and parkingLoad distribution on the bicycle rack: Height between the centre of gravity and the ball coupling; Distance at the rear between the centre of gravity and the ball coupling= Centre of gravity is located on the central axis of the vehicleWhen loading the bicycle rack, comply with the following notes:Number of bicyclesGross weight of bicy-Max. distance :Max. distance ;cle rack and load3up to 75 kg420 mm300 mm420 mm400 mm4 5up to 100 kg 55When transporting four bicycles or a gross weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycle racks withadditional support on the guide pin of the trailer tow hitch.
Bicycle rack
240
Driving and parking
Load distribution on the bicycle rack
: Height between the centre of gravity and the ball coupling
; Distance at the rear between the centre of gravity and the ball coupling
= Centre of gravity is located on the central axis of the vehicle
When loading the bicycle rack, comply with the following notes:
Number of bicycles
Gross weight of bicy-
Max. distance :
Max. distance ;
cle rack and load
3
up to 75 kg
420 mm
300 mm
420 mm
400 mm
4 5
up to 100 kg 5
5
When transporting four bicycles or a gross weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycle racks with
additional support on the guide pin of the trailer tow hitch.

Related Topics

Popular Owner Manuals